Home

FZ3 Series User's Manual

1. S SSSeSC 277 ID Code E 279 Circle Angle n LGQM 280 Compensate image Tn 282 Position Compensation T 00L w 282 Trapezoidal Correction TTL C 282 Filtering nw 283 Background Suppression 0000 0C 283 Color Gray Filler mmn MMMMHHHHeemmm8IHHHeeHeIHIHH MSHSHHSHOMHHIMMSMRHAMMSHHHeHHHheHmeen 284 Extract Color Filter mmmeeeHMeHRnMRHeemmIHIHRRHHHHHHenHHHeHMHMMMMSHeHHHHIHSHAMHMAMHMHHeHumeHHn 285 Anti Color Shading TT 286 Stripes Removal Filtert eee s terse sence seen cease eee eee eeee eee ee eee ee ee eenaeeeenaaeeeanaaeeaeanenaaaees 286 Halation Cutt e HII n nee eeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeneneeaanaeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeasenenneeeees 287 Panorama eI I ceegaa eae eeeeeeane ena hh hah nhanh ehh ann nane h enhn hs n nnne nnn nnne 287 Polar Transformation TL 288 4 FZ3 User s Manual Support measurement AAE n R R RIN AN m Mm M N M N N R BOR RN RIS RN RI A MR RN HN R R R N RUN RUN MCN m RR MN HN RR aC ER CRRA M m M N ECR CA A RR E RUN NUR NR 8 ACR NUN NR B R 289 Calculation LL LLLI nn 289 Line Regression senem 289 Circle Regression meme 290 Calibration t ccccttececeessseeeenessseccsceeeeeeeesneeeennnnneeeeeaanaeeeeeeeeestteeeesennneeaaeanaaneasaseeertnntnees 290 Seat Unit Data ccccctccccccsssecceecsssccccceeeenesssseeeenn
2. 500 to 508 Actual coordinate Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set Unit Data No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 120 Set Get 0 to 9999 121 Set Get 0 to 99999 Get Unit Data 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 120 Set Get 0 to 9999 121 Set Get 0 to 99999 Set Unit Figure 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to 24 Data 0 to 19 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 120 Target unit Set Get 0 to 9999 121 Register figure No Set Get 0 to 999 122 Target figure No Set Get 0 to 7 123 Number of setting data items Get only 0 to 20 Get Unit Figure No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 1 Number of figures Get only Number of figures acquired FZ3 User s Manual Support measurement 291 Se qe soudjajoy JeuJo x3 5 2 Size of figures Get only Size of figures acquired Target processing 120 Set Get 0 to 9999 unit No 121 Target figure No Set Get 0 to 999 Figure 0 type 0x0000 Undefined 0x0001 Point 0x0002 Line 0x0004 Wide line 0x0008 Rectangle Get only 0x0010
3. 6 7 8 9 Response data RES DATA Length 10 changeable CMD FLG Command completion bit Turns on when command execution is complete GATE Data output completion bit Turns on when data output is complete 162 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command execution in BUSY Turns on when command execution is in progress progress bit CMD CODE Returns the executed command code RES CODE Stores the response from the executed command RES DATA Response data Stores the response data from the executed command Output Area Controller FZ3 to PLC Output area Bit tpchame 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Sm 0 1 DATAO Output data 0 2 3 DATA1 Output data 1 4 5 DATA2 Output data 2 6 7 DATA3 Output data 3 8 9 DATA4 Output data 4 10 11 DATA5 Output data 5 12 13 DATA6 Output data 6 14 15 DATA7 Output data 7 Signal Signal name Function OnpUPdGDS The data set in the output processing items is output DATAO 7 0 me When there are multiple processing items data is overwritten to this area while handshaking is performed Data storage to the PLC I O memory varies depending on the PLC to be connected Reference Memory Display Image on PLC I O p 353 Command Control PLC Link This section explains each command used in PLC link Measurement control command Command area top channel 3 2 Function 0010 1010 Mea
4. Response format When processing is performed normally OJK r When processing is not performed normally E RIER Parameters explanation System Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path ex USBDisk abc bkd scene group Only files that are under the following systems and have a BKD extension can be read data RAMDisk File name USBDisk Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When LABEL 1 BKD in the IMGO1 folder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded to the controller Command BIKIDIL JOJAJD USBDisk2 IMGO1 LABEL1 BKD lt Response gt BKDSAVE The system scene group 0 data currently being used by the controller is saved to a file lt Command format gt IBIKIDISIAIVIE r e File name of system scene group data 188 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Response format When processing is performed normally When processing is not performed normally IE R Parameters explanation Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path ex File name of USBDisk abc bkd system Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be sure to attach a BKD scene group extension to the file name data RAMDisk USBDisk ESSS LL Do n
5. b AI Fi Processing items supporting the aforementioned parallel processing are specified below You can improve the takt time effectively by combining the applicable units using an ingenious processing flow Not supported Supported ee Parallel ue Parallel M Parallel Processing item Processing item Processing item processing processing processing Camera image input Fine matching O Set unit data samera mage pe Character inspection O Get unit data HDR Camera switching Date verification EE Set unit figure FZ3 User s Manual Setting Operation Mode 33 uoneJedo eJojeg cm ee Model dictionary Get unit figure i T Conditional judgement output Gravity and area O Panoramat gt Display image file Labeling O Polar transformation es aspe Label data Calculation Focus O Labeling O Line regression lris O Reference Depending on the processing unit the processing speed of the unit itself can be raised 34 Setting Operation Mode FZ3 User s Manual Single line High speed Mode Measurement is performed using 2 CPUs which means that compared to conventional models twice the number of measurement targets can be inspected in the same time In this Single line High speed Mode CPUO and CPU1 execute the same inspection flow alternately for each STEP input to improve the multiple image input performance and reduce the takt time to as much as one half Reference About
6. 220 Control Output through EtherNet IP FZ3 User s Manual This section describes how to set communication specifications and the I O format required when communicating with external devices through a parallel interface Set the controller communication specifications Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device Note During setting of communication specifications input signals cannot be handled However the input status can be checked with confirmation Reference Checking the Communication Status Parallel Interface p 223 1 On the Main screen tap System menu Communication Parallel The Parallel window is displayed 2 Tap Setting to set communication specifications Duiput polarily Output control Output period us Gate ON delay wa Dutpul Line ms Timeout s Husber of delay ns shet QR signal uipul time s FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 221 seoi eq jeuie x3 uyim Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Duioeuuo 10 SDOUleS N 222 Setting value eae Item IE Description default Select whether to turn on OR and DOO to 15 when Output polarity judgement result is OK or when it is NG Method to output measurement results without synchronizing None with external devices Refe
7. 9 Note 1 If a speed of 38400 bps or higher is selected effective communication cannot be guaranteed depending on the cable length because speeds of over 20 kbps are not defined in RS 232C standards In this case set the communication speed at 19200 bps or lower 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Serial window closes Checking Communication Status Non procedure Check the communication status with connected external devices using the serial interface You can check whether wiring and communication settings have been performed correctly 184 1 n On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial RS 232C 422 The Serial window is displayed Tap Confirmation to check the I O status Check or uncheck the Local echo check box siring TEST STRIMG RA Local echa Trangfsi Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual When it is checked the transfer character string from the device is displayed in the Confirmation window 4 Any character string can be input when editing the character string to be sent through Transfer A character string with up to 12 characters can be entered v Local echa 5 Tap Transfer string Local echa Contents of String are displayed on the window Check that there are no problems ON Description Send Character strings sent from external devices are displayed Rec
8. Command V EIRIGIEIT 9s Response FizI3 IXIX X Vielr 12 1010 12 010 8 10 9 2 5I9n Output Format Non procedure If the processing unit Data Output is set in a scene measurement results are sequentially output starting from the smallest data No set in Setting of Data Output Reference Processing ltem List Manual Data Output p 418 When Outputting ASCII Data Set the output format as ASCII in Setting of the Data Output processing item The factory settings default value is ASCII Output format y X M i cies i a ey a Data measurementvaue Dalai measurementvaue Data measurernent vue En Note The output format number of digits and the data separator etc can be changed if necessary Reference Processing Item List Manual Data Output p 418 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 211 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Example Integer digits 5 digits decimal places 3 digits negative numbers field separator comma record separator delimiter B 3 4 Caa measurement value Data measurement value Data 2 measurement value Data 7 measurement value Field separator Record separator Note Field separ
9. N 0to7 N Oto 7 Set Get 0 to 359 133 10 x N Register the min color hue N N20to7 N 0to7 Set Get 0 to 359 Register the max color n n i 2 saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 Register the min color a n saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0to7 Register the max color c 2 brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 Register the min color n E E 2 brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 0 Black 138 10 x N Register the BG color N T Arr N Oto7 N Oto 7 in 4 Blue Characteristic application The RGB value for the coordinate specified during 5000 RGB value pixel density data Set Get set up is saved in measurement data When acquiring the data saved in measurement data is returned FZ3 User s Manual Compensate image 285 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouo8J9Jos JeuJ9 x3 o 5001 Selected color extraction range Set Get Characteristic application The color extraction range number selected during set up is saved in measurement data When acquiring the data saved in measurement data is returned Anti Color Shading No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 Color 1 lt Color 2 106 Direction Set Get 1 Color 1 Color 2 2 Color 1 Color 2 107 Shading level Set Get 0 to 255 l l 0 OFF 108 Filtered image Set Get 1 ON Stripes R
10. 0 7 to 2 7 mm Aperture adjustment knob Aperture adjustment knob Lens extension dimension 0 to 2 0 mm Aperture locking screw M1 4 Lens locking ring E Aperture locking screw M1 4 Lens locking ring FZ3 User s Manual About Lenses 307 sexipueddy o sexipueddy o Max O D Thickness so ie ws i i 12 m 7 Extension lube 5 mm Extension tube 10 mm Extension tube 15 mm 3 piece set Do not overlap the 0 5 mm 1 0 mm and 2 0 mm extension tubes Since these lenses are installed between the lens and the threaded section of another extension tube overlapping of 2 or more of these tubes will cause unstable fixation When a close up exceeds 30 mm reinforcement is necessary depending on the amount of vibration 308 About Lenses FZ3 User s Manual Error Messages and Troubleshooting This section lists error messages that display on the screen and solutions AWE ERR When a message with this symbol is displayed the ERROR signal on the parallel interface is on Error message No value set Please set value Error of the expression Cannot add object Out of range of specified characters of expression The problem occurred in the camera connection A ERR Failed to start the window Memory is insufficient Warning range shall be set within the range from judgement lower to upper limit The Search measurement result ma
11. 1 0 to 1000 0ms Valid only when Output control is set to None Set the GATE Output time l signal ON time Set the time required for external devices to 5 0ms i l acquire measurement results Control Output through EtherNet IP FZ3 User s Manual Valid only when Output control is set to Handshaking A timeout error occurs when no response from external devices is received within the time that has been set A timeout error 0 5 to 120 0s occurs if the status of each flag does not change within the Timeout specified time in the following situations The DSA flag turns ON after the measurement is completed The DSA flag turns OFF after the GATE flag turns ON The DSA flag turns ON after the GATE flag turns OFF 10 0s 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the EtherNet IP window closes Memory Allocation EtherNet IP This section explains allocations for each area including the Command area Response area and Output area Command area Master Slave FZ3 Command area Bit top channel 15 14 13 12 11 10 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 0 ix ERE Control input sl DSA 2CH 2 Command code 3 CMD CODE oon 4 5 Command us parameter 7 CMD PARAM ie te 8 6CH 9 Signal Signal name Function Executes commands Reference Command Control EtherNet IP p 219 Requests the next data output Reference Data Output EtherNet IP p 219
12. 6 Tap OK asi ination File name I EDiskaXcesene D scm Help Of Cengal The window showing transfer status is displayed and the data is sent to the save destination FZ3 User s Manual Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device 121 ejye Bulpeo7 bulaes e1eq Buipeo1 Bui eg o Logged image data in the controller memory is saved to RAMDisk or USB memory Reference About Saving Areas p 116 1 When saving to USB memory plug a USB memory device into the controller 2 On the Main screen tap Data Save to file The Save to File window is displayed 3 Tap Logging image and select the file to save ail Iocrinz imace C Select image All logging image Saves all the logging images Saves the selected logging image Tap and select the image to save Data to be saved Select image 4 Specify the save destination folder Dest ination Folder name SBDi sk 5 Tap OK bination Folder name SEDI sk The window showing transfer status is displayed and the data is sent to the save destination 122 Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device FZ3 User s Manual The drive information of the controller can be checked 1 On the Main screen tap Other menu System information The system information is displayed 2 Information of each drive is displayed in the Memory state dialog box If a USB memory is inserted the
13. 80 Key Points for Adjustment FZ3 User s Manual Shortening Processing Time Find out which processing units are taking the most time and adjust the parameters of these processing items taking time 1 Insert the processing item Elapsed Time after the processing unit for which time is to be measured Camery Image Input A 2 Execute measurement 3 After tapping the Detail result area tap the elapsed time processing unit where time is to be checked The elapsed time from the top of the flow to the relevant processing unit is displayed Flaw Elapsed Tina dl se amp krch OK n A Elapsed Tias 5 Edre Poaltlon T ok 4 Adjust the parameters of the processing units that are taking time For details on adjustment parameters see Key Points for Adjustment for each processing item in the Processing Item List Manual FZ3 User s Manual Key Points for Adjustment 81 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg 1ueujaunseeyv 1soe Burwood o Displaying Multiple Windows Together Multiple images can be displayed side by side in the Image Display area 1 In Image display of the Main screen Control area tap of the Image layout menu and select the number of images to be displayed The camera image view in the Image Display area switches according to the selected contents het ive dinge Positions Sub image mage d I There ar
14. Effective for detecting whether the label position is off center raised or lowered and whether the label is affixed on bottles and cans Reference Processing ltem List Manual Edge Position p 120 Search Effective for position measurement that includes tilting of the measurement object due to handling with robot arms Reference Processing ltem List Manual Search p 48 Flexible Search Effective for position measurement of measurement objects in which there are variations in markings or shape such as with inspection of packaging etc Reference Processing ltem List Manual Flexible Search p 59 Position measurement Circle angle Effective when measuring bottle caps etc after correcting the rotation angle Reference Processing Item List Manual Circle Angle p 282 Processing Item Selection Guidelines 57 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes Search If the shape and background of the measurement object are constant a processing item such as one that registers an image as a model and searches for this image is effective Reference Processing ltem List Manual Search p 48 Other positioning Locating of reference mark of base plate Method objective Detection of the defect stain and spot of plain measurement objects MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E Scratches burrs Inspection for minor defects contamination and objects with backgrounds other
15. Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Address 0 Command area Response area Area Set the Command area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Area Set the Response area Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 159 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Address 100 Response area Data output area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Area Auxiliary Bit Area AR Set the Data output area DM Area DM EM Area EMO Addes 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the 200 Data output area Set whether or not to provide an interlock with the PLC when performing data output None None Data is output regardless of the Handshaking status of signals from the PLC GATE is always OFF Handshaking Data is output after confirming DSA from the PLC Output control 1000 to 999999 Retry interval ms 10000 Set the communication retry interval PLC by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation nS 243206 422 PL Link Selking Command area Area Data register Addrezz Rasponse araa Aree Date register Address i Data Tulput area Aree Data register Address LRA Quipul con
16. STU V WX Y Z2 4 the shared name is displayed in the Network folder For FZ3 9 9 O FZ3 H9 U the drive letters such as E F G and H are displayed 144 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Specify the shared folder name Specify the name of the folder that has been created in advance on the network drive For example if the host name is VISION and the shared name is COMMON specify a name such as WISION COMMON Username l Enter the user name and the password to access the network drive Shared folder If you are unclear about the user name or the password contact the device network administrator Password 4 Tap OK 5 Tap OK on the network drive setting screen and close the screen The setting is enabled after the controller is restarted portant 0 0l lll hh When image logging or data logging is executed for a network drive the communication may be disrupted and the logging process may not be executed successfully due to the controller measurement load that becomes too heavy when the multiple image input function is used In this case set a reasonable amount of measurement takt time If many drives are set as network drives it may require a greater amount of time to start the controller Do not pull out the LAN cable while the controller is accessing the network drives Start the controller when the network drives are ready A co
17. USBDisk RAMDisk FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 201 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey mportant ccc Ifthe specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When scene data of scene No 3 is saved with the file name LABEL SCN in the SCNO1 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned lt Command gt SICINISIAIVIE 3 YUSBDisk2 Y IMGO1 LABEL1 SCN Response OIK 9a SCRSWITCH owitches the ADJUST window RUN window The currently displayed window switches to the ADJUST window or RUN window f the current window is the RUN window it switches to the ADJUST window If the current window is the ADJUST window it switches to the RUN window Command format S CIRIS 11 T C He lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally SGRLOAD Reads scene group data lt Command format gt siciRiLjolajo TT Ts File name of scene group data Scene group No max 2 digits 202 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Response format When processing is performed normally OIKER When processing is not performed normally
18. dataLoggingDirectory saving data logging character Example 1 imageLoggingDirectory When creating settings so that image logging is only performed during NG errors lt Command gt sIYISIDATIA Llo od d inl Ti imal of e L of alot hg ME lt Response gt Example 2 When the RAMDisk is set as the image logging save destination Command s vIsipjAIrIAI ItIelaTali n aT Ti Im aleTe TC ToD a el iInTa DTi Ir Je Tc Te oT rTvI Tv IRTA M ID Ti s ks Response OJK Sr 206 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual SYSLOAD Reads system data Command format s vis LioAlD File name of system data Response format When processing is performed normally OJK r When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path File name of Only files that are under the following systems and have an INI extension can be read system data USBDisk RAMDisk Important Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When LABEL INI in the IMGO1 folder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded Command SIYISILIOIAID USBDisk2 Y IMG01 Y LABEL INI Response OIKER SYSSAVE Saves system data lt Command format gt Save destination FZ3
19. im ON S STEP input OFF m ON Perform Measurement X Final judgment OFF ON Sse Rising time E Output time Output period lt lt si Total output time Output period X number of output data Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Example Flow 2 If there is a process after a Parallel judgement output setting example 2 0 Camera Image Input 1 Sea rch 2 Parallel Judgement Output 3 Data Logging Starting the RUN window Starting the ADJUST window OFF RUN ON OFF STEP ON FZ begins the measurement while paying attention to the start OFF ON of the STEP signal OFF J READY ON Executing image input OFF Y Executing measurement BUSY ON OFF OR Overall judgement ON OFF DO Parallel judgement output ii DO0 DO15 OFF GATE ON a Output cycle GATE turns ON after waiting for GATE starting time upon completion of the parallel judgement output process in the flow Output signal Signal Function RUN Turns on when the controller is available for measurement and the RUN window is displayed It is OFF in the ADJUST window so switch to the RUN window during operation Indicates that controller is currently measuring or switching the scene Do not input next command BUSY while the BUSY signal is on Otherwise on going processing or commands that are input will not be performed correctly Outputs overal
20. 0 OFF 1 ON Profile display Set Get Element display Set Get Fine Matching co O OCO1 101 102 103 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 274 0 No judgement unmeasured Judgement result Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Output Coordinates Set Get 0 After scroll 1 Before scroll Soe i 0 OFF Normalization Set Get 1 ON 0 OFF Perturbation Set Get t ON 0 Binary Label No Set Get 0 to 2499 0 Area ascending 1 Area descending Sort condition Set Get 2 X ascending 3 X descending 4 Y ascending 9 Y descending 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Character Inspection 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get d dns 1 OFF a 1 OFF 120 to 123 Dictionary unit number Set Get 0 to 9999 0 OCR 124 Inspection mode Set Get 1 OCR Count 2 OOV 0 125 Direction ra 2 3 T 0 OFF 126 Character output 1 ON 127 Character output destination Set Get ne eI ne 1 Ethernet 132 Dictionary candidate point level usage Set Get 0 Not used flag 1 Used 133 Rough candidate Set Get 0 to 100 134 Detail candidate Set Get 0 to 100 135 Di
21. 3 Details Shows the details of the selected figure Specify the object coordinates or radius Tapping Jor will display the items currently not displayed C Zoom Browser Area Magnifies the Image Display area by the selected magnification factor Setting Methods Rectangle Image selection status Points are displayed at each of the four corners Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When enlarging Drag the lower right point down in a diagonal direction B E m om ss o om m om o Ao DO ho o RO E E E Lj E E Amo E Ao X DO A E GA E HH Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows 336 Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual Upper lefi position t A Center Position t Cw ale 3l 4 IJ i Lower right position EX Line Image selection status Points are displayed at the starting point ending point and midpoint of lines Dimension Adjustment Drag the points N N Example When changing the length of a line Drag the points toward the intended direction a a a O Example When changing the oblique direction Drag a point in the direction the line is to be changed Example When changing the line width Drag the center point of the line in a direction perpendicular to the line Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two
22. Executing Measurement Executes measurement one time Command PLC to Controller Command area Command E TA top channel code 15 12 11 8 3 0 i 2 1010 0001 0000 0001 0000 Satconimand 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 1 4 3 0 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 n 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Starting Continuous Measurement Starts continuous measurement 164 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command PLC to controller 2 3 0010 Command area Command Bit top channel code 15 12 11 8 0010 0000 0000 1020 0001 0000 3 0 Description 0000 Set command 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area top channel 19 12 11 8 2 0001 0000 0010 3 0000 0000 0001 4 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 Stopping Continuous Measurement Stops continuous measurement Command PLC to controller Command area Command top channel code 15 12 2 1030 0001 3 0010 0000 Response Controller to PLC js I s e 0000 0000 Description 0000 Command code 0000 Response code Command execution result 0000 OK 0 000
23. FZ SQ U 000 js used FZ3 User s Manual About Max Number of Loading Images during Multiple Image Input 349 sexipueddy sexipueddy E For the case of character related process items recognized characters are output to an external device using a character code base 10 Calculation method for output value base 10 Number of upper level bits x 16 number of lower level bits of recognized character Output value Examples If the recognized character is 2 50 is output If the recognized character is C 67 is output Upper 4 bits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 e P Lower 4 bits 350 Character Code Table FZ3 User s Manual For processing items where the upper limit value is changed based on the image size of the camera being used the description of the upper limit value is expressed using MAX Upper limit values for each camera are as follows The max value in the X axis orientation Y MAX ine may value in the Y axis 479 1199 2043 orientation W_MAX Maximum width 239 straight 319 line W 599 straight line W 1021 straight line W 799 1223 R MAX Maximum radius 239 circle ell ipse 599 circle ellipse 1021 circle ellipse R1 A MAX Maximum area FZ3 User s Manual R1 319 X_MAX 1 R1 799 1223 X_MAX 1 X_MAX 1 Y_MAX 1 Y_MAX 1 Y_MAX 1 307200 Y PMAX Maximum number of lines that 479 1199 2043 m can be loaded 19
24. If DSAis not turned on within the retry interval 0 to 999999 ms after the processing flow has been adjusted to the order of data output units the GATE will be forcibly turned off and data output will end Mmm After measurement completion the DSA is turned on from the PLC and data output is requested The FZ3 outputs data After output is complete GATE is turned on The PLC confirms that GATE has turned on loads data and then the DSA is turned off The FZ3 confirms that the DSA has turned off and then GATE is turned off If there are 2 or more serial data output units in the processing flow turn on DSA from the PLC and issue the next data output request 8 to 11 2nd data output same as 4 to 7 12 When the FZ3 completes execution CMD CODE RES CODE and RES DATA are set and then CMD FLG is turned on 13 The PLC confirms that CMD FLG has turned on and then CMD EXE is turned off 14 The FZ3 confirms that CMD EXE has turned off and then CMD FLG and BUSY are turned off Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 177 seoi eq jeuie x3 uyim Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey Ladder Program Example PLC Link This section shows a PLC ladder program example P First Cycle 100 00 100 01 Command Command completion bits execution bits during execution 1 Command area 0 101 00 MOV Data output comple
25. MEASURE MEASURE Measurement result OK OK Measurement result FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 137 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y DBuiDueu 5 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o Setting the RUN Window Display RUN mode View Setting The layout of display contents and size of characters can be set 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller RUN mode view setting The current RUN window mode is displayed To change the mode specify the mode in System Controller Select RUN mode 2 Set items to be displayed UTI Mab ibi dd TlaialBide Uinn tel oe Lica T lew Scene oP Tuo Ae ELT LIT 3 Setthe layout as required L igsul 0 Scene Group 0 O Scene 0 setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut The short cut button can be added to the RUN window The button is added to the tool box 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Create shortcut 2 Setthe functions to be added Le Lal Added short cul 3 Set the sequence as required Short cuts are added in the sequence set here 138 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Y Toolbox Switch to ADJUST mode Enter simplified non stop adj Scene switch Some of these short cuts have functions such as scene switching which affect measurement A password protection function
26. Not displayed display 1 Displayed 0 Black l 1 White 128 VARIAR dd acts Per 3 Green 4 Blue 129 Filtered image Set Get R n Mud 1 Filtered image Filtering No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120 Target Set Get SEMI ToS 1 Prev unit image 0 OFF 1 Weak smoothing 2 Strong smoothing 3 Dilation PT 4 Erosion 121 Filtering Set Get 5 Median 6 Extract vertical edges 7 Extract horizontal edges 8 Extract edges 9 Enhance edges CA 0 Filtering to BGS 122 Filtering order Set Get 1 BGS to Filtering 0 3 3 Lower limit for 124 BGS levels Set Get 0 to 255 Upper limit for 125 BGS levels Set Get 0 to 255 Background Suppression No Data name Judge FZ3 User s Manual Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Get only Compensate image 283 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo x3 5 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJ9 Xx3 o 0 RGB common 1 RGB individual 122 Lower limit for common colors Set Get 0 to 255 123 Upper limit for common colors Set Get 0 to 255 121 Color setting mode Set Get 132 Filtered image Set Get pe mage Dichio TSnSIer 1 Image after transfer 200 Transfer source image number Set Get 0 to 9 201 Transfer destination image number Set Get 0 to 9 Color Gray Filter No Data name Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement re
27. ORO OR1 ERR STEPI 054 Description The input status of each signal from the external device to the controller is displayed When a signal is input the background color becomes red The output status of each signal is displayed When a signal is output the background color becomes red The output status from each signal of the controller to external devices can be specified Changes between ON and OFF and between 0 and 1 can be simulated without READYOREADY performing measurement DO Operation mode Multi line random trigger mode FZ3 9 OO H9 LILI series only I O STEP DSA DI RUN GATE BUSY OR ERR READY DO FZ3 User s Manual Multi line random trigger mode Line 0 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Other than Multi line random Line 1 trigger mode STEP1 STEPO DSAO DSA DSAO DIO to DI7 DIO to DI7 DIO to DI7 No output RUN STEPO ERR common ERR READYO READYO DO8to D015 DOO to DO7 DO8 to DO15 DOOto DO15 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 223 seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey ES OO 3 That status of each of the parallel terminal signals STEP DSA GATE OR and READY can be checked on the screen with STEPO DSAO GATEO ORO and READYO If the operation mode FZ3 9 OO H9 ODO only is Multi line random trigger mode line 0 uses GATEO ORO READYO STEPO and DSAQO while lin
28. Plug the USB memory device which has the load data stored in it into the controller Send setting data to the controller s RAM Disk via FTP 2 On the Main screen tap the Data menu Load from file The Load from File window is displayed 3 Select the file to load The window showing the transfer status is displayed and the data is transferred 126 Loading Settings Data to Controller FZ3 User s Manual Changing the System Environment FZ3 User s Manual This chapter describes settings related to the controller system environment i Reference Setting Conditions for Camera Use p 128 il Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 130 Reference Setting the System Operation Environment p 131 127 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu 5 Verify whether or not cameras are connected This section includes no special settings 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Camera Camera connection The Camera Connection window is displayed 2 Verify the connection status This creates settings for the delay from when the input trigger STEP signal is received to until the shutter trigger occurs When multiple cameras are used this prevents mutual lighting interference and can be used as a simple trigger delay when only one camera is used Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o 128 Setting Conditions for Camera Use FZ3 User s Manual Note The STGOUT pulse width i
29. SPUSE 2 First half is 1 second half is 2 Upper limit for data calculation M Set Get M 0 to 15 Even number is upper limit odd number is lower limit 196 to 227 Lowerdmittordata Exp upper and lower limits for inclusion processing unit ealeulation M Set Get 1 2 First half is 1 second half is 2 M 0 to 15 Data comment M Exp comment character string for inclusion processing AED EAS MES 9 45 SURE unit 1 2 First half is 1 second half is 2 500 to 515 Ue l o l Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Display result 301 Se qe soudJajoy JeuJo x3 5 sexipueddy o 302 Appendixes i Reference i Reference Reference im Reference Reference i Reference Reference i Reference About Lenses p 303 Error Messages and Troubleshooting p 309 FAQ p 313 Measurement Mechanism p 316 Terminology Explanations p 325 Basic Knowledge about Operations p 329 Setting Figures p 335 About Number of Logging Images p 346 i Reference About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used p 347 i Reference About Max Number of Loading Images during Multiple Image Input p 349 im Reference im Reference Reference Reference Character Code Table p 350 Upper Limits of Processing Item Parameters p 351 About Memories Usable with FZ Series p 352 Memory Display Image on PLC I O p 353 FZ3 User s Manual When using a camera single refer to the fol
30. Shape Search p 255 Classification p 257 Edge Position p 258 Edge Pitch p 259 Scan Edge Position p 260 Scan Edge Width p 261 Color Data p 262 Gravity and Area p 263 Labeling p 265 Label Data p 267 Labeling p 268 Defect p 272 FZ3 User s Manual i Reference Reference im Reference im Reference Reference im Reference im Reference Reference Precise Defect p 273 Fine Matching p 274 Character Inspection p 275 Date Verification p 276 Model Dictionary p 277 Barcode p 277 2D Code p 279 Circle Angle p 280 Compensate image Reference Reference im Reference i Reference im Reference Reference Reference Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference Position Compensation p 282 Trapezoidal Correction p 282 Filtering p 283 Background Suppression p 283 Color Gray Filter p 284 Extract Color Filter p 285 Anti Color Shading p 286 Stripes Removal Filter p 286 Halation Cut p 287 Panorama p 287 Polar Transformation p 288 Support measurement Se qe eouaeJ9Jos JeuJo x3 5 Reference Calculation p 289 Reference Line Regression p 289 Reference Circle Regression p 290 Reference Calibration p 290 i Reference Set Unit Data p 291 FZ3 User s Manual 245 Se qe eouo8J9Jo JeuJo x3 o im Reference Reference im Reference im Reference Reference im Reference im Reference Reference im Refe
31. color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 164 N x 10 Register the max color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 165 Nx 10 Register the min color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 166 Nx 10 Register the max color brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 167 N x 10 Register the min color brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 0 Black 1 White 168 Nx 10 Background color N Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 264 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Labeling No Set Get Data range sie 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 6 Get 0 to 9999999999999 7 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Get 0 to 999999999 10 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 ror Output coordinates sevcet Aer 102 Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Set Get 0 to 359 121 Set Get 0 to 359 122 Set Get 0 to 255 123 Set Get 0 to 255 124 Set Get 0 to 255 125 Set Get 0 to 255 126 Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Black 1 White 127 Background color Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 128 Set Get 0 to 999999999 129 Set Get 0 to 99999 130 Set Get 0 to 99999 m ds monochrome RES d illi 0 OFF 132 Filling up holes Set Get t ON A af ace 0 OFF 133 Outside trimming Set Get 1 ON 134 Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 135 Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 0 Area ascending 1 Area descending 3 X descending 4 Y ascending 5 Y descending 137 Set Get 0 to 2499 138 Set Get 0 to 2500 139
32. p 178 Reference b Processing Item List Manual Labeling p 196 Measuring dimensions Method objective Measurement of width of measurement objects Dimension inspection of finished products Dimension inspection for circular shapes and tilted parts References Edge Position Effective when measuring the width of measurement objects Reference Processing ltem List Manual Edge Position p 120 Edge Position Calculation To measure the dimensions of finished products combine Edge Position and Calculation Use Edge Position to measure position and Calculation to calculate dimensions by calculating the distance between positions Reference Processing Item List Manual Edge Position p 120 Reference Processing Item List Manual Calculation p 338 Edge Position Calculation Edge Position is effective when measuring the dimensions of circular works and tilted measurement objects Use this processing item to measure position Calculation to calculate the spacing of positions and then the dimensions Reference b Processing Item List Manual Edge Position p 120 Reference Processing Item List Manual Calculation p 338 FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 59 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 1ueuiaJnseo A seueog Dunes E Measuring folding of papers and sheets Method objective Check for folding on plain measurement obje
33. the controller may be damaged Please discuss this with one of our branches or regional offices Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link p 157 Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 183 Failed to transfer data The free capacity of RAMDisk may insufficient Increase the free capacity of RAMDisk and then perform this operation again Error in input range Please input using the correct range File name contains invalid character Failed to save file Please check Fan voltage error ERR Clean up the content of RAMDisk to increase free space If this error occurs even though enough free space is available scene group data may be too large Review the inspection flow Please verify range for setting and set up again Please confirm that characters such as X amp SPC space are not included in the file name Check the following points Is the memory of the save destination sufficient For cases where the save destination is the folder in the USBDisk is the USBDisk connected to the controller Or the controller may not have detected the USBDisk Switch off controller and verify if fan is affected If error message is still shown after restart the controller may be damaged Please contact one of our branches or regional offices 310 Procltem error Xxxx Xxxxerror This is displayed when the application softwa
34. 1 Judgement result NG 6 Get 0 to 999999999 9999 7 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get E d 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Label unit Set Get None 1 to 9999 121 Label No Set Get 0 to 2499 122 Upper limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 123 Lower limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 124 Upper limit of gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 125 Lower limit of gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 126 Upper limit of gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 127 Lower limit of gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 267 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 Xx3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJo Xx3 o Labeling 0 No judgement not yet measured 0 Judgement Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Number of labels Get only 0 to 2500 6 Getonly 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Getonly 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 9 Gravity X coordinate Get only 0 to 9999 10 Gravity Y coordinate Get only 0 to 9999 20 4 N x 10 Measurement of feature N 0 to 7 quantities for judgement Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 condition e eo eee Getonly _ 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N Oto7 judgement condition e ete line ore Te DUE Getonly 999999999 999
35. 1 to 9 136 Region skipping Set Get 1 to 19 137 Reduction Set Get 10 to 100 O No rotation 138 With rotation Set Get 1 With rotation 139 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 140 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 141 Skipping angle Set Get 1 to 30 0 No size change 142 Move axis Set Get Peewee 2 X change 3 Y change 143 Upper limit of the size change Set Get 50 to 150 144 Lower limit of the size change Set Get 50 to 150 145 Size change skipping Set Get 1 to 99 146 Reverse Set Get MODO TENETS 1 Reverse EC Circle Search 0 No judgement unmeasured Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 6 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 19 Count 0 to 256 101 Output Coordinates Set Get peer So 1 Before scroll FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 253 Zz So qe soudlajoy JeuJo Xx3 5 So qe eoua8J9Jo JeuJ9 Xx3 o 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Black 142 Target Set Get 1 White 2 Black and white wa poea jae ra 0 3x3 1 5x5 150 Mask size Set Get 2 7 x7 3 9x9 151 Edge extraction level Set Get 0 to 255 153 Upper limit of position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 154 Lower limit of position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 155 Upper limit of position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 156 Lower limit of positio
36. 20 r3 B y Ed Nana ee CHEN m Threshold values can be determined Ba 4g u Buuuuruu uzzzzoszzuczem asum 4r Hdatab ja DiE dle Comparing Logging Data and Logging Images Compare image and measurement data to confirm correctness and to make analyzing trends for when NG occurs easier The measurement data and image data stored through the logging function is associated through FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 103 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg measurement IDs based on the measurement date and time In this way measurement data can be made to always correspond with image data Verify data with the measurement ID Tos Hap Qu E 3 F isah E Eoi B bel i TORT r Pie Edo View Powie Logging image folder Biss ah arm T midi Foki g MEN Logging data meeer re Tween qj et 12 0 42 ades Images are correlated with measured data via measurement ID T 1 Le T 2 T T T I T bom dm dm d dee dm dim amp de o ui xz Ab dal dab ba Eb n Od Pi P Clearing Measurement Results uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o Clears all of the currently displayed scenes This function sets the expression which calculates the measurement count and is convenient when that count is to be reset 1 On the Main screen tap Measure Clear measurement A confirmation window is displayed 2 Tap OK Clear data
37. 30 Useful processing items when setting up camera Focus focus adjustment and lris iris adjustment have been added to support camera adjustment during startup Reference Processing Item List Manual Focus p 397 Reference Processing ltem List Manual Iris p 400 NG analyser This tool supports various analysis tasks at startup and during operation such as identifying optimal thresholds using sample images and finding the causes of problems occurring on the line by analyzing logging images Reference Using NG Analyser p 108 PLC link Support of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation PLC The MELSEC Q series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation has been added to the list of devices this sensor can communicate with via PLC link Reference Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link p 152 Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link p 157 List of model specific new functions Type of controller FZ3 New function 300 FZ3 FZ3 FZ3 FZ3 FZ3 FZ3 H3 0 0O 00 H7 0 0O 90 0O H9 O O L35 O Function Operation mode Reference Setting O O Operation Mode p 30 NG Analyser Reference Using NG Analyser p 108 FZ3 User s Manual Checking System Configuration 21 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg Support of PLC link MELSEC Q series Reference Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link p 152 Refere
38. 74 i Reference Performing Test Measurement p 77 i Reference Key Points for Adjustment p 79 i Reference Arranging the RUN Window p 82 i Reference Useful Functions for Operation p 90 13 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o ADJUST Window and RUN Window After test measurement and remeasurement are performed check the measurement results If there are problems adjust the processing item setting values of the processing units If the measurement results are stable switch to the RUN window and perform measurement This section describes the ADJUST window and RUN window ADJUST Window Judgement Deere ipa reeult and ADJUST ZEN 000 measurement MEME 18ms ng RE t ima for the A R Q4 antira scena ar displayed Tha unit with HG is displayed in red FZ MEM1G PPP Tha measured as object can be ss 1 ON displayed C camera image i x 323 5 v gt 40 AREA 1035 a a Fai ith joa The measurement result The current display settings ig displayed in feat are shown Also you can change the display settings har RUN Window There are two types of RUN windows Normal mode and fast view mode Change the display speed according to the intended use Note Switching method for RUN window normal mode and fast view mode Reference Switchi
39. C E LC Cu M AO SO OCC NIC ga Fo amp ders Aya Lj teet Meese Lj More has aes L in rg LL MEN Ll i dm T ee d uj Pei n II yr L4 LT me agi TI 3 OMPR N C3 LOMA ua El Ly Ww 3 Open using an application associated with the extension csv Explanation is given here using examples displayed in Excel 102 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual MAE Dun jaa dal alme NI Osbee 62 amp o n Ar DP EN OOM 1042 508 ZOORCOMTZ 10482 5264 20060412 1042 5415 20060412 1042 5550 2006041 7 1042 54638 20050412 1042 5732 20060417 1042 5804 20060412 1042 5898 20060412 1042 5548 200850412 1043 0004 20060412 1043 0183 Q06041 2 1043 00 4 1 g 3 4 5 6 T 8 E I 4 Use Excel graphing and functions to process and analyze data For example the optimum threshold value can be calculated i ETE lai atag z a d n G amp 8 HgS4 T ine 2r amp t goa O SEB Ox x Bh mes a a s z 4 B LU E F rr H i J E ka 2008041 2 1042 508 E t 165 20080412 1042 5264 i 54 E B Bee 2 1042 5485 a s Er 120 20060412 1042 5850 28 114 JON S 1042 5538 rr j 30 15 gto SOM P 1042 Tee B or 100 Pr a 20000412 1042 504 0 3 30 5 2 ns J FHE OCCT 21 042 5888 A H a Hada OM 2 p a 0 4 rx m8 n bes c WU YET ORO 2 104390084 4 n 115 j i E 20050412 1043 183 4 38 139 Bh B 20060412 1043 0048 g
40. CMD CODE Command code Stores command codes CMD EXE Command execution bit DSA Data output request bit CMD PARAM Command parameter Stores command parameters Response area Master Slave FZ3 Response area top channel 0 1 FZ3 User s Manual Control Output through EtherNet IP 217 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO SPON 2 Command code CMD CODE 3 2CH 4 Response code 5 RES CODE 2CH 6 Response data 7 RES DATA 2CH CMD FLG E ne COPEN Turns ON when command execution is complete Data output GATE l Turns ON when data output is complete completion bit BUSY sonal nee Turns ON when command execution is in progress in progress bit Turns ON when the overall judgement result is NG OR Overall judgement The OR signal is output when the checkbox for Output is selected in the ADJUST window RUN RUN window Turns ON when the controller is set to the RUN window CMD CODE Returns the executed command code RES CODE Stores the response from the executed command RES DATA Response data Stores the response data from the executed command Data area Master Slave FZ3 Output area Bit X top channel 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 AA 0 ame 0 DATAO Output data 0 2 3
41. Details p 204 FF VERGET Acquires system version information Reference je Details p 210 Backup Restore commands Command Abbreviation Function References BKDLOAD OFF Loads System Scene group 0 data Reference Details p 187 BKDSAVE OFF Saves System Scene Group 0 data in a file Reference Details p 188 DATASAVE OFF Saves System Scene group data in the controller s memory Reference Details p 190 IMGSAVE OFF Saves the image data Reference b Details p 194 SCNLOAD OFF Loads the Scene data Reference Details p 200 SCNSAVE OFF Saves the Scene data Reference b Details p 201 SGRLOAD OFF Loads the scene group data Reference b Details p 202 SGRSAVE OFF Saves the scene group data Reference Details p 203 SYSLOAD OFF Loads system data Reference b Details p 207 SYSSAVE OFF Saves system data Reference b Details p 207 Utility commands CLRMEAS Clears all of the measurement values of the current scenes Reference Details p 189 RESET Restart the controller Reference Details p 197 BKDLOAD Reads system scene group O data FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 187 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey lt Command format gt BIKIDILJOJAIDY If er ers File name of system scene group data
42. Di DIO Aun Command Command information Input format DI7 to DIO Item Description Continuous Measure continuously measurement during input of commands Execute Command information nput example DIA to 0 kkkkk The controller does not detect this signal so a setting of either 0 or 1 makes no difference Input example 10000000 Scene Switch measurement switch scenes Scene group Switch measurement switch scene groups Clear measurement Clearing Measurement vaigs The OR signal and DO Values signal are not cleared Clear error output Clear Error The ERROR indicator is also cleared E Clear the OR signal and Parallel DO sianal OR DO gue 0 OFF 1 ON Switch to scene Input Scene No in 2 binary format Input example 10100010 Switch to scene Input Scene Group group 2 No in binary format Input example 11100010 Input example 11000000 Input example 11000001 Input example 11000010 Operation mode FZ3 9 H9 only Multi line random trigger mode Input format DI to DIO D D6 D5 Di4 OS Die DIO T TO T OO Wo ta Hun Command Line Mo Command information FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 225 seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO SPON So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOU 9 Input format DI7 to DIO T Comma
43. Edge width Min Edge width Ave Lostwidth FZ3 User s Manual Set Get Get only 1 Fix the number of area divisions Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 to dist X MAX Y MAX 0 to dist X MAX Y MAX 0 to dist X MAX Y MAX 0 to 100 Measurement 261 Se qe soudJajoy JeuJo x3 5 So qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 X3 o 101 102 103 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 145 146 147 148 149 150 0 After scroll Output Coordinates Set Get Upper limit of the average width Set Get 0 to 1 Before scroll dist X MAX Y MAX Lower limit of the average width Set Get 0 to dist amp MAX Y MAX Upper limit of the lostwidth Set Get 0 to 100 Lower limit of the lostwidth Set Get 0 to 100 Monochrome edge detection mode Set Get 0 Light dark 1 Dark light Edge level absolute value Set Get 0 to 442 Edge level specification method Set Get 0 1 Absolute value Scan lines Set Get 1 to 100 Scan width Set Get 1 to 200 Display area Set Get 1 to 99 Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON Set Get 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Upper limit of the average width Lower limit of the average width Upper limit of the los
44. Get 1 to 255 sort 160 Nx 10 Flag N used for registered color Set Get 0 Not used N Oto7 N Oto 7 1 Used 461 Nx10 Flag N for registered color OR 0 OR N 0 to 7 NOT Set Get 1 NOT N 0 to 7 l 162 N x 10 Register the max color hue N N 0to7 N 0to7 Set Get 0 to 359 163 N x 10 Register the min color hue N N 0to7 N 0to 7 Set Get 0 to 359 Register the max color uis saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 Register the min color saturation n Bion N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 Register the max color AS brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 Register the min color m AOT brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 0 Black 168 Nx 10 Background color N Pale N 0to7 N 0to 7 Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 0 Light 500 Dynamic binary classification Set Get 1 Dark for monochrome cameras only 2 Equal 3 Not equal Dynamic binary average filter 501 size Set Get 3 to 255 for monochrome cameras only 503 Reference angle Set Get 180 to 180 504 Extraction condition setting Set Get r pius FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 269 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o 505 506 Sort condition Set Get XY sort condition Set Get Area Gravity X Gravity Y Gravity XY Elliptic axis angle Elliptic major axis Elliptic minor axis Ratio of approximate ellipse Width of circumscribed rectangle 9 Height of circumscribed rectangle 10 Up
45. HS Scene switch Biama i Signal output OF E The Edit Flow window is displayed 3 Select a processing item to be added from the processing item tree EID Mesunsmeni fe o Ems Poia Hj ane Pash poen iia Puin zi coe Ei H E Ciir Dota To aats and Arua gis x Lares ie e A Lae Dein Kh moa JA Preng Detect Wu Fee Haigh L a WE Chea F pectin Um pute erigi pw Lum Verfeatin A Bia Dic ere de Cere Arg m mut esse 3 2 Cempercate migr m Juppeori eure merit Lm meh 3 DD Duda eet m 3 Hemne Fiesibie p p Leni trem tarih CM fame Lc Caci Daet hh al Etpa Fini dro Pan man Ede Pod i Hi ta Edee Welt ocr ula i ey and Area Lite Lana j Label Tala s PM Se dh ee RE lea MR Dete The selected processing item is appended at the bottom of the unit list flow FZ3 User s Manual Creating a Scene 47 MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes 5 Continue to add processing units Repeat the steps after Reference 3 p 47 Note Limitations on settings The number of image input processing items that can be used is limited Reference amp About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used p 347 6 Either tap the icon of the processing unit to be set or tap the Set button Procltem setting button ED Meare E Q2 Fibi Zaan h CT Demais Saa a
46. Image Save Last Logging Image This section explains the method for logging the latest input image being displayed 1 On the Main screen tap Measure menu Save last logging image The Logging Setting window is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 97 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg 1ueujaunseeyv 1soe Burwood o mi x 2 5 5 Tw pet o Jr Fu gn Hi z o Set the logging images save destination Specify the image file save destination RAMDisk or USB memory Edit the file name as required que nue zo0g 10 22_16 53 57 844 i2 i Kind 1 Fz logging inage GE Tap OK After the logging operation is complete the Save Last Logging Image window closes Setting Logging Conditions Logging Setting oet the logging timing and the save destination 1 On the Main screen tap the Measure menu Logging setting The Logging Setting window is displayed 2 Setthe logging conditions for images Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Setting value m D ee Setting item Factory escription default No images are saved None When logging images with the processing item Image Logging select None Image Only NG Only images with an overall judgement of NG are saved Logging All measured images are saved All Note however that some images may not be saved if Measurement is set in Logging priority i
47. LEH100 FZ LEH75 Y view mm 3Z4S LE ML EXR cannot be connected with the FZ LEH25 5 megapixel digital camera stand alone FZ S O 5M 10000 The 5 mm extension tube E Appendixes FZ LEH50 D i oOo N I I wW LL T o1 N N Wo LL FZ LEH12 FZ LEH16 FZ LEH8 FZ LEH5 1000 ww eouejsip jusujeoe d eJeuje 100 1000 100 Y view mm FZ3 User s Manual About Lenses 304 Diagram view The horizontal axis of the diagram indicates the Y field of view mm and longitudinal axis indicates camera setting distance mm This diagram shows the relationship between the field of view of lenses and the setting distance for different types Make sure to verify the lens type when checking the graph as the field of view value is different for each type Points such as t5 0 on the graph correspond to the thickness of the extension tube used tO is used if an extension tube is not necessary and t5 0 is used if a 5 mm extension tube is used Example If the field of view of measurement object is 40 mm and a 3Z4S LEML 5018 lens is used the camera setting distance is set at 500 mm and a 5 mm extension tube is required Camera Extension tube L mm zi ens Camera placement distance Type of lens du Measurement objed Y view Small camera FZ SF O SP O series 10000 FZ LES30 FZ LES16 FZ LES6 1000 FZ LES3 100 1 10 100 1000 Y view mm FZ3 User s Manual About
48. Lenses 305 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Diagram view The horizontal axis of the diagram indicates the Y field of view mm and longitudinal axis indicates WD mm This diagram shows the relationship between the field of view of lenses and the setting distance for different types Make sure to verify the lens type when checking the graph as the field of view value is different for each type Points such as t5 0 on the graph correspond to the thickness of the extension tube used tO is used if an extension tube is not necessary and t5 0 is used if a 5 mm extension tube is used Lens Types and Outside Diameters screws for filter r Max O D 1 32 UNF C mount screw Full length Lens 3Z4S LE ML series Pere Lens type Brightness Full length Filter size 3Z4S LE ML0614 6mm 30mm M27 P0 5 High resolution and low distortion lens Model FZ LEHx series Focal Lens type Brightness Max O D Full length Filter size 306 About Lenses FZ3 User s Manual Lens for small digital cameras FZ LESx series Aperture adjustment knob Extension Tube An extension tube which is installed between lens and camera is used to adjust focal distance Different combinations of the 7 tubes can be used to achieve any desired thickness Extension tube Max O D Thickness 5mm emm 1mm 0D 5mm 030 Extension tubes for small digital cameras FZ LESR Lens extension dimension
49. Manual About Connecting with External Devices With the FZ3 serial interfaces and parallel interfaces can be used to communicate with external devices With serial interfaces RS 232C RS 422 and Ethernet can be selected as communication ports Non procedure and PLC link can be used with either communication port Data transfer through EtherNet IP tag data link communication or FTP is also possible with Ethernet Protocols usable with serial interface The protocols that can be used with a serial interface are listed below Controls the FZ3 through commands from a PC or specialized device mon procegure Also possible to control from the PLC The FZ3 is controlled and measurement results are acquired only through data memory operations in the PLC The FZ3 reads commands in the data memory DM and channel I O CIO in the PLC executes measurement and writes execution results to the data memory This is appropriate when the PLC is used as an external device The PLC supported by the FZ3 PLC link protocol is the SYSMAC CS CJ CP One series PLC from OMRON models supporting FINS command and PLC MELSEC Q series from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation PLC link With a parallel interface control such as measurement control scene group switching scene switching clearing errors clearing measurement values clearing parallel terminals is possible PLC link function refers to a function that communicates using 3 link areas indicated bel
50. Multiple Image Input Function p 239 The time needed to measure one work is shorter when Parallel operation High speed mode is selected Single line High speed mode is only effective when the multiple image input function is used If the multiple image input function cannot be used consider using Parallel operation High speed mode Reference amp About Multiple Image Input Function p 239 Presence of certain processing items such as Data Output Parallel Data Output and Parallel Judgement Output in the first half of the flow may cause the performance to drop when Single line High speed mode is selected If the performance drops markedly consider using Parallel operation High speed mode In the Single line High speed Mode certain processing items such as Trend Monitor and Display Last NG Image may not function properly Do not use these items Also with the processing item Calculation calculations that use values in previous steps do not function properly When Single line High speed mode is selected Enter simplified non stop adj cannot be used The functions to set get measured values using external commands do not operate correctly Do not use these items FZ3 User s Manual Setting Operation Mode 95 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg 1 CPU STEF STEF Shortest takt time T al Camera Droeeesing Measurement proces QU LILITE II i i j T Jj i i j 1 emm Maasuremeri proc
51. None Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PL C Link p 157 Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 183 FAQ 315 FZ3 User s Manual sexipueddy sexipueddy E Measurement Mechanism This section describes how to configure measurement in accordance with the images acquired from cameras This product is prepared with comprehensive processing capabilities for measuring items Common processes for various processing items are described here Color Processing Mechanism The images acquired from cameras are available with color information such as R red G green B blue RGB images can render 16 7 million colors on the screen and adjustment of color intensity with a range of 0 to 255 can be performed For each of RGB black is rendered with a 0 value and white is rendered with a 255 value During measurement of color images many colors can be measured by adjusting the RGB values When measuring the blue part de R 0 4 J When measuring the black part FA a B a 0 B 255 SAMPLE a UR red part G 0 B 0 For monochrome cameras color processing is not performed search Processing Mechanism Reference image patterns are registered as models and then search is performed using the parts of input images that most resemble the models The degree of similarity is represented with a correlation value and inspection
52. Number of files Set Get 1 to 4 121 Camera No 0 Set Get 0 to 3 122 Camera No 1 Set Get 0 to 3 123 Camera No 2 Set Get 0 to 3 124 Camera No 3 Set Get 0 to 3 Display Last NG Image No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to 12 ma oe n Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 0 No judgement unmeasured Set Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 1 OFF 0 One NG 120 Judgement mode Set Get 1 All NG 0 Image 121 save type pis 1 Image data 122 Number of logging Set Get 1to4 123 Target processing unit Set Get 1 to 9999 number 1 Images in own processing unit saved 124 Image memory setting flag Set Get s a Condition exp N 140 to 147 N 0 to 7 13 to 20 Judge judge N N 0 to 7 Set Get Exp character string for inclusion processing unit 0 300 Display result FZ3 User s Manual Upper limit of condition calculation M M 0 to 15 Set Get Even number is upper limit odd number is lower limit 148 to 163 Lower INIEOLGeHdItion Exp upper and lower limits for inclusion processing unit calculation M Set Get 0 M 0 to 15 164 to 171 Condition comment M Set Get Exp comment character string for inclusion processing M 0 to 15 unit O Data exp M Exp character string for inclusion processing unit 1 ToU ee i Oto
53. OFF 1 Comma 2 Tab 3 Space Delimiter 0 0 4 142 Record separator Set Get 0 OFF 1 Comma 2 Tab 3 Space 4 Delimiter 0 144 to Output IP address 1 to 4 only when Ethernet is selected Set Get Output IP address 147 px um for the communication method Output IP address setting i 149 only when Ethernet is selected Set Get ole a chau n 1 Individual specification for the communication method Parallel Data Output No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to Data 0 Geloni BCD 999 to 999 12 Data 7 y Binary 32768 to 32768 128 Data format Set Get 0 Binary 1 BCD FZ3 User s Manual Output result 297 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o Parallel Judgement Output 0 No judgement unmeasured Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to Data 0 20 Data 15 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 21 to Judge 0 36 Judge 15 Get only 1 OK 1 NG 0 Unmeasured 136 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 137 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 138 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 139 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 140 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 141 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 142 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 143 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 144 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 145 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 146 9999
54. PEDE 1 Displayed Grade Axis non uniformity display 0 Not displayed is setting DataMatrix QR eee 1 Displayed Grade Grid non uniformity display 0 Not displayed 128 setting DataMatrix QR FRUGS 1 Displayed Grade Correction of error not used 0 Not displayed i display setting DataMatrix QR Sues 1 Displayed 300 to 335 in eem Compallsoncnaractel Set Get Verification string used for classification 0 Not output 400 Character output flag Set Get 1 Output 0 RS 232C 401 Output device Set Get ie Eanes 402 Error output Set Get Error output flag 403 Error message Set Get Message output while outputting an error Circle Angle No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Center position X Get only 0 to 99999 9999 6 Center position Y Get only 0 to 99999 9999 7 Rotation angle Get only 180 to 180 8 Get only 0 to 99999 9999 9 Get only 0 to 99999 9999 10 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 101 Output coordinates Set Get TERO 1 Before scroll 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Search 120 Mode Set Get 1 Edge 2 Defect 121 Skipping angle Set Get 0 1 to 10 280 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 122 Edge pitch Set Get 1 to 99 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 281 Se qe soudJajoy JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o Compensate image Position Compensation No Data name Set Get Data ra
55. S y BulbuUeUD 5 ES o0 L o0 1 e A XX Do not set EtherNet IP and PLC link at the same time They cannot be used at the same time Example SetSerial Ethernet PLC link and Fieldbus EtherNet IP at the same time Set Serial RS 232C 422 PLC link and Fieldbus EtherNet IP at the same time Set PLC link and Fieldbus EtherNet IP at the same time to both serial Ethernet and serial RS 232C 422 Do not set PLC link to both serial Ethernet and serial RS 232C 422 They cannot be used at the same time Operation mode FZ3 9 M 9 FZ3 H9 P P only atartup re timg Siste Communication p peratsi n mode salting Operation moda lHigh spesmd logging moda Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o Item ende Description Factory default P Parallel operation high speed mode Single line High speed mode Sets the operation Operation l mode High speed logging mode mode a Reference Setting Multi line random trigger mode oc on Mods pi Non stop adjustment mode p p 3 Tap OK Settings are confirmed and the Startup Setting window closes 136 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Reference About Normal Fxxx series method With the Normal Fxxx series method communication method the OK response timing in relation to MEASURE commands is different from that of the Normal communication method Normal Fxxx series method communication method Normal communication method
56. S camera 2 ES camera 5 ee camera Type of controller camera cameras cameras cameras camera cameras cameras cameras camera cameras cameras cameras camera cameras cameras cameras FZ3 L35 H FZ3 3 4 FZ3 70 U FZ3 9 4 sexipueddy o FZ3 H3 0 0 FZ3 H7 D D FZ3 H9 0 O Intelligent compact camera 752 pixels x 480 pixels 0 3 megapixel camera 640 pixels x 480 pixels 2 megapixel camera 1600 pixels x 1200 pixels 5 megapixel camera 2432 pixels x 2044 pixels Note 1 2 megapixel cameras can be used with software version 3 30 or later For monochrome cameras 0 3 meee camera 2 DS camera 5 eee camera Type of controller camera cameras cameras cameras E cameras cameras cameras A m cameras FZ3 L35 Bo m 19 FZ3 3 0 U A No No FZ3 H3H 0 1 1 FZ3 7 0 0 FZ3 H7 2 2 EE FZ3 H9 0 0 0 3 megapixel camera 640 pixels x 480 pixels 2 megapixel camera 1600 pixels x 1200 pixels o megapixel camera 2432 pixels x 2044 pixels Note 1 2 megapixel cameras can be used with software version 3 30 or later 346 About Number of Logging Images FZ3 User s Manual About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used The number of image input processing items that can be used within one scene is limited by the combinations of the camera If the limit is exceeded a measurement NG occurs due to a memory shortage during measurement Please use within this processing items limit
57. SES Unchecked Data save is executed will be the scene scene scene group group at start up Scene groups Scene 0 to 31 l l Groun Scene Selects the scene group displayed during start up 0 Scenes 0 to Scene 31 Selects the scene displayed during start up Scene 0 Bode ds ADJUST Selects whether the ADJUST window or RUN window j RUN is displayed during start up Measurement manager bar Open Selects whether to display the measurement state Close manager bar during start up Specifies whether measurement results display or menu operation is to have priority Measurement results display processing is prioritized l s result priority Menu operation will be harder to receive due to its Operation priority priom y lowered priority status Measurement Menu operation priority Menu operation is prioritized Measurement results display may be incomplete Measurement initialization is performed immediately after scene switching or flow editing Whether measurement trigger reception or screen re drawing processing has priority during measurement initialization can be specified Measurement trigger reception is prioritized even during measurement initialization processing Display for screen re drawing processing may be incomplete due to its lowered priority status Measurement initialization Measurement priority trigger receipt priority Processing of Screen re drawing processing i
58. Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 337 sexipueddy sexipueddy E AERE t al Pe e a End point Fa 3 Jp e vidth i mmm Center Position T ah le Circle Ellipse Image selection status is Points are displayed on the top bottom left right and lower right of the circle Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When zooming in on a circle Drag the point on the lower right of the circle J ka ee Example When transforming a circle into a long horizontal ellipse Drag the point on the right of the circle to the right 338 Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual a mm Ld ey y 1 Y f r Lo T i m p LI Fg a Set Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows Ellipse 8 aoe Center Posi it ion Center Position 1 320j 240 e 3 lej i aj gt Radius X me Hadius Y ies ej Circumference Image selection status Points are displayed on the top bottom left and right of both the inner and outer circles Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When enlarging the entire circumference Drag a point on the outer circle FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 339 sexipueddy sex
59. Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Ethernet window closes 182 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual oetting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure Communication specifications such as communication speed and IP addresses are set for serial interface RS 232C 422 connection communication Reference Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet Non procedure p 179 portant 8 nL L l Before setting the communication specifications set the Serial RS 232C 422 communication module to Normal or Normal Fxxx method save the setting to the controller and then restart the system Reference amp Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device If the operation mode FZ3 9 U O H9 C O only is set to Multi line random trigger mode this setting is not supported for line 1 RS 422 is disabled on the FZ3 L35 H series Reference During setting of communication specifications input signals cannot be handled However the input status can be checked with confirmation Reference Checking Communication Status Non procedure p 184 When data is output via serial communication output is suspended while communication specifications are being set 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communicatio
60. Tap the Move Image file button Tap the Skip button to skip processing and remeasure the next image 92 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Changing Judgement Conditions without Stopping Measurement Using the simplified non stop adjustment function makes it possible to change the judgement conditions of processing units of the currently displayed scene without stopping the measurement processing being executed Note The simplified non stop adjustment function can only be used in RUN window normal mode However it cannot be used when the operation mode FZ3 9 OO H9 LILI only is set to Single line High speed mode Non stop adjustment mode Also it cannot be used in the ADJUST window or RUN window fast view mode Ifthe Enter non stop adj button is not displayed the button can be added with the system controller RUN window short cut setting 1 In the Control area of the Main screen RUN window tap Tool box 2 Tap Enter non stop adj Transfers to simplified non stop adjustment mode Enter simplified non stop adj is displayed at the upper part of the Control area flow Measurement will continue without stopping Tool box Switch to ADJUST mode Enter simplified non stop adj 3 Tap the icon of the processing unit with the judgement condition to be adjusted How Suri adi nor SLE adi istmeri i bake NG omit Next NG uni Q Scene group 0 D Scene 0 The wind
61. The file or folder will be selected 2 Tap Copy B amp 3 Selectthe target folder and tap Paste Renaming a Folder or a File 1 Tap the name of the file or folder to be renamed from the List View area The file or folder will be selected 2 Tap Rename E The soft keyboard is displayed 332 Basic Knowledge about Operations FZ3 User s Manual 3 Enter a new name New folder Character input method Reference Inputting Text p 329 Note When a file or folder with the same name exists within the folder an error message will display telling you that you cannot change the name Deleting a Folder or File 1 Tap the name of file or folder to be deleted from the List View area The file or folder will be selected 2 Tap Delete 9 amp A confirmation window is displayed 3 Tap OK The selected file or folder will be deleted Using the Zoom Function opecifies the magnification settings of the image displayed in the Properties window 100 000 CT a a Zoom browser Indicates where the zoom display area is in the original image b Magnification factor Input the magnification factor A factor of between 25 to 1600 can be input FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Operations 333 sexipueddy sexipueddy o C Operation buttons 334 Pea Zoom in button Enlarges the selected area to twice its size J Original size button Dis
62. X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link This section explains how to set the required communication specifications and the input format when using PLC Link to communicate with external devices Communication Processing Flow PLC Link Communication between the PLC and FZ3 is performed using the 3 link areas indicated below the command area response area and data area The command area is used when control commands are sent from the PLC to the FZ3 The FZ3 can be controlled by writing commands to the command area In the response area the execution results of control commands described in the command area are written The output data accompanying measurement is written to the data output area PLC link area Controller FZ3 Command area Gommand data to the controller is written Control input Command code Command parameters Command written to the command ares is executed Execution results are writen to tha PLC response area Execution results from the Control output controller ara written 4 Command coda Response code Response cata Data output area Output data accompanying Output data from the measurement is written Lo controller is written the data output area Output data 0 te 7 When using PLC Link it is necessary to specify PLC Link with the communication module Reference Setting the Start up Stat
63. an overtime erar Error message will displayed in the window of controller and ERR signal of parallel interface is ON oetting Communication Specifications Ethernet Non procedure Communication specifications such as communication speed and IP addresses are set for Ethernet communication Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 183 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 179 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuiex3 uy Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse mportant 1 8 J Before setting the communication specification set the Serial Ethernet communication module to Non procedure UDP Non procedure TCP or Non procedure UDP Fxxx series method Save the setting to the controller and then restart the system Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device When making system settings Ethernet settings do not send external input into the Ethernet If the operation mode FZ3 9 MH O H9 8 H only is set to Multi line random trigger mode the controller address cannot be set for line 1 The same setting for line O is used If the operation mode FZ3 9 M O H9 H O only is set to Multi line random trigger mode set a different port number for lin
64. and line 1 Input the output destination IP address 3 Tap PLC link setting The PLC Link Setting window is displayed So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SDOUe N 154 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual 4 Setthe following items Ethermet PLU Link Setting Command ares Aree i Address Razponge ares Aree Address Data Oulput arga Ara i Address utipul contro Retry interval msi Setting item Command area Data register Data ragiztar 160 Data register IHandshak ing imos Setting value Factory default Description Area Response area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the 0 Command area Set the Command area Area Data output area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM Set the Response area EM Area EMO 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the 100 Response area Area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM Set the Data output area FZ3 User s Manual EM Area EMO 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Data 200 output area Communicating through Serial Commun
65. be locked with a password The following 3 operations can be locked Switching from the RUN window to the ADJUST window Performing simplified non stop adjustment on the RUN window Changing screen structure of the RUN window 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Password setting The Password Setting window is displayed 2 Specify each of the following items C Do noi usse a password 8e 4 password Zwiteh ta ADJUST mode I Simelitied nor siap adiustaent Central ar a deerat ion Tool box operat ton Parsword chang ing Help HE Cancel Set value Factory Description default enone A password is not used for operation using the RUN window password A password is used when the following operations are performed with the RUN window Place a check next to the operation items for which a password is to be Uses set ASSA Switch to ADJUST mode p Simplified non stop adjustment Control area operation Tool box operation Password l i chandind Tapping this button displays the Password Changing window 142 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Note No passwords are set with the default settings When setting passwords for the first time tap Password changing and set a password Setting or changing a password 1 On the Password Setting window tap Password changing 2 Tap Old passeord t m Mew passeord Don
66. checked automatically Procltem name Are the character types more than two Yes Characier Inspection MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E No Is shape of character changed Is character oblique 54 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Defect Contamination Inspection a g 5 m Is defect with background Defect Does backoround 13 fineness of characters position OR and ines n graph consistent Yes defects exist m characters graph and models di Fine Matching Search Are defect with specific color Gravity and Area Color Data Quantity Inspection Measurement Prochem name Side by side FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 55 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Bues E Inspection for Presence of Different Objects Judgment condition Number of markings Is shape of marking la the marking Pracltem name changed ablique Judged oy marin A Speci the Rotahon ange oi measuremeni parametr Judged by color difference Gravity and Ares Judged by color difference g Hole Position Measurement Color Data Circle shape i Procltem name Perfect circle Cirde Search Q Selecting Measurement Processing Items According to the Measurement Method and Purpose This section describes methods for selecting processing items appropriate to different measurement obj
67. communication environment Make sure to verify on the actual usage environment before use The communication speed of the controllers for the FZ3 L35 9 3 8 O 7 UU series may be faster than the speed of the controllers for FZ3 9 H 4 series depending on the conditions Memory Allocation PLC Link This section explains allocations for each area including the command area response area and output area Command Area PLC to controller FZ3 FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 161 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Command area Bit top channel 15 14 13 12 11 10 9181716 543 2 1 0 Same a E Control input il DSA 2CH 2 Command code 3 CMD CODE CH 4 5 6 Command i parameter CMD PARAM is Length 10 changeable Signal Signal name Function l Executes commands ONERE AE maa o Reference amp Command Control p 163 Requests the next data output pen Peter Mieaneer ol Reference Data Output p 174 CMD PARAM Command parameter Stores command parameters Response Area Controller FZ3 to PLC ROMAIN 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 312 Name 0 LL LLL LE EE e S h ref control output H LE LL db LL d d t d dL 1 1 1986 gcn 2 Command code 3 CMD CODE 2CH 4 Response code 5 RES CODE 2CH
68. coordinates corresponds to 0 1 mm in actual size Screen 200 pixels Measurement flow A measurement processing series is called a measurement flow You can combine processing items to create measurement flows Detection point This is the point that specifies the coordinates of which part of the model are to be output by the search and ECM search processing item The initial value is at the center of a model Candidate With regards to search based processing items search flexible search ECM search classification character inspection model dictionary both a rough search which is a search over the entirety of the measurement region and a detailed search which is a search in areas of the rough search where correlation was high are performed The candidate point is the point at which an area becomes a candidate for Detail search The candidate point level represents the rough search correlation value If stable search of a model is not possible set the candidate point level lower Sub pixel Points that are formed finer than pixels In the case of search processing if sub pixel processing is turned on for measurement parameters interpolation measurement is performed using sub pixel units Scene Measurement processing that is created with a combination of units Preparing a scene for each measurement object or measurement content makes it easy to change measurements Reference What Is a Scene p 42 326 Termi
69. ee TORE Ce CT ER a a a a a a a a rn 32 High speed Logging Mode STEERER 8 8 OUO Te ee EEE Ce ee eer CUN NT RN RUN Cw UR UU RON eR hee ee NON a 32 Parallel operation High speed Mode DU eee Ee eM ee Ee eR A eR aOR CIC Ce RR ee RCE ERC Ra RCH ene ee 32 Single line High speed Mode Tere mE RRXRAMNEREREAEEAERMNIEEREEGAERASR NEAR IE CCE CEE CER CET eee ee eR er ree 35 Multi line Random trigger Mode PLETE Te EEE OC OPO CECE RE CORES RE EE EK ee ee ee ee TR eRe 37 Non stop Adjustment Mode eT TRC EL MI Re ER eRe CeO Ee eR LR eC EET TIE 38 2 Setting Scenes Measurement Flow Re eee M c LIV UEM IM CDL M IN dE une MM UI QE 41 What Is a Scene EERE CRC eR ER CRE ae MER EC ee ace eee MONT CUR ee eRe ee Ree aCe ARM RR ACE Ae eee CR RCIUR RUE OL ACRAS a RR ee CR ee eee 4 Scene Examples UE eee Ee CT ee RR CRT eT eC ee CCAR CT ER eT eS eT CAE Oe ee ee ee ee ee 4 What Is a Scene Group aaa E a Y a SUR RON CRURA E RON COR ECR CEE CT EER ERT ROPER C RCE ECR RT Re eRe ee eT ae NER 46 Creating a Scene SLCC Eo M Ce Le eee Se CREPE Ce eee ee ERT eT Tee EE BUG NM RN EAR M UR CR TN UR er a ar a er Rc RU AT Processing Item Selection Guidelines eRe CORRER RECO DR UNO ee UN RUNE UR NR C RC NON ON NOR ee DN OR DANN RON RE GA ARN UR MCN NUR NC 49 Selecting Measurement Processing Items Using a Chart Ter rete ee eT eee RT CANT Tee Ee TT CE ee eee 49 Selecting Measurement Processing Items According to the Measurement Method and Purpose METUENS ERE TEER LLLI LARA CRE CCE eT ee ee ee ee ee CR e
70. for Skipping angle is small the processing speed is slow because search is performed without the amount of model information being reduced Specify appropriate values for Stab Prec and Skipping angle according to the measurement conditions Value for Stable Precise Small Value for Stable Precise Large Value for Skipping angle Large Value for Skipping angle Small Measurement time Short auia Measurement time Long Measurement precision Low Measurement precision High Correlation value With processing items that use search processing judgement is performed through correlation values Correlation values are used to check the consistency degree of similarity between actual measurement images and reference model images If portions of a measured image are missing or if shapes are 318 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual different the correlation value is lower Model image For partial defect For wide line For dark iamge Correlation 54 Correlation 74 Correlation 99 Larger Horizontal Different shapes Correlation 43 Correlation 58 Correlation 58 search Angle Range Skipping Angle These are values based on the model registration image that indicate the allowable rotation interval skipping angle and overall maximum rotation range for the model angle range Search is performed for objects that most resemble these acceptable models Example When angle range is 15 and skipping an
71. for defects and different parts being mixed in can be performed The search process is performed over several distinct stages 316 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual 1 Register a reference model Register the package markings as a model Model Status and Measurement Processing Measurement time and accuracy may be affected by the status of model in the following ways Please select measurement objects that are in good condition clean for Model Registration In the case of large or complicated models processing time is prolonged With extremely small models or models without features search processing is unstable 2 Perform rough search of overall measurement region Search for the model over the entire measurement region Ll Search range Search model range m 8 Mogel 3 Perform additional searching near the model mu ens L Model Search Detection Method With search processing there are two types of detection methods Search by Correlation CR and search by Shape PT The detection method can be selected by changing the Rotation settings for each processing item Setting item Description Measurement for locations where there is high correlation similar areas between the color of the CR model registration image and the input image is performed Since brightness is normalized in thi
72. measure FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 321 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Noise Width Set the width for judging noise When no color is specified If another edge is detected within the width range starting from the point where an edge was first detected the newly detected point is considered noise When a color is specified If the color difference distributions again falls below the edge level within the width range starting from the point where an edge was first detected the newly detected point is considered noise Edge detection point Mettre pa TEEF Hhne value Is Belew the Edge level within the region i specified Width it is considered as noise es Noise width pixels N 205 4 Edge level When points are mistakenly detected as edges due to noise increase the color difference value Defect Detection Measurement Color changes within the measurement region are used to find defects such as scratches contamination and chipping After measurement region is drawn a rectangle defect detection region is automatically formed in this region While moving the defect detection region around calculate average density for each area to determine the difference between the original area and the surrounding area This difference is called the defect level Calculate the defect level for all defect detection areas If the maximum value exceeds the judgement value it is judged that there are defects in the mea
73. position compensation are output X a i Y After position compensation with factory settings Coordinate values after position compensation are output FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 323 sexipueddy o sexipueddy o Calibration Select whether or not to perform calibration when selecting output to external devices Reference Calibration p 326 Calibration ON Calibration is performed during output and measured values after calibration are output Calibration OFF Calibration is not performed during output and coordinate values from camera images are output 324 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual This section gives descriptions of terms Position compensation When the location and direction of measured objects are not fixed the positional deviation between reference position and current position is calculated and measurement is performed after correcting Please select processing items that are appropriate to the measurement object from processing items that are related to position compensation Reference position Maasuramant area and objects lo be measured are correctly aligned Measurement area Object t ba measured When pasilion of object lo ba measured is daflacted Object t ba measured evaerfiows Measurement area When posilion deflection correction is selin advance Measurement will ba carried oul after Measurement will be carried oul after moving tha ima
74. response Command area PLC to FZ3 Response area FZ3 to PLC Data output Command area PLC to FZ3 Response area FZ3 to PLC Output area FZ3 to PLC FZ3 User s Manual Measurement time 1st data output 2nd data output ON i CMD CODE E i Command code ri OFF CMD PARAM n E i Command parameters i OFF j z ON CMD EXE x tion bit D E Command execution bits OFF Mins f a ON LL CMD CODE IE E i E Command code A N F OFF H Li s 1 ON AX NE ue H BUSY mr Command execution bits during execution pi TES E OFF i Em i ON i RES CODE EM d Response code A A AX OFF y ae d ON umm E RES DATA EE GE I R dat oe esponse data 7 B ON PEG it CMD FLG Command completion bits i r6 OFF lt 1 BE 4 i12 i3t4 isiemi ia 19401112 13 14 e EHE ay srr O l ON ey te Gow DSA en Data output request bit 3 E aE a output request bits o p DE i Li ON E E GATE Data output completion bit utput completion bits OFF ON DATAO 7 7i Output data 0 to OFF 1 CMD CODE and CMD PARAM are set from the PLC and then CMD EXE is turned on The FZ3 receives an execution instruction wN When the FZ3 receives the execution instruction BUSY is turned on and the command is executed
75. s Manual Measurement value G When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt plOce Sowa URI Specifies the processing unit No 0 to 9999 No External Varies depending on the specified processing unit processing items For details see the reference table External Reference Table of the processing items registered in the processing unit No Reference amp External Reference Tables p 244 Measurement The acquired measurement value is output as a response Example When the judgement result of Search set as the 6th processing unit processing unit number 5 is acquired external reference table value is 0 Command UIN TID ATIA 5 0 lt Response gt ofer OlKIcR Changing processing unit parameters The set parameters for the processing units set in the scene currently being used are changed lt Command format gt UIN ITTTPTATTATL TT TT TT TT TT TTT Fx Setting data Exlemal relerence table No Processing unit No max 4 digits Response format When processing is performed normally OJK r FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 209 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt piece lg unt Specifies the processi
76. signal isn t ON within the the set time isn t ON within the set time setting time Reference The output signal functions the same as when Output Control is set to None Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 228 Input signal Signal Function This signal is used to request the next data transfer from external devices The controller does not output data until the DSA signal is on Turn the DSA signal on in the following cases The receiving system for external devices is complete The controller has completed measurement The BUSY signal is on during measurement As a result the timing of when measurement is complete can be understood by observing the BUSY signal DSA 232 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual When Output Control Is Set to Synchronization Output This method enables synchronization between processing timing on the line and timing for output of controller results After the STEP signal has turned on the number of times set in number of delay in the communication specifications measurement results will be output the next time the STEP signal turns on Reference When the communication specification Output Control is set to Synchronization output levels will be counted according to the number of times the STEP signal turns on For this reason perform settings so that results are output only once for each measurement 1 unit for Judgement O
77. sure to attach an SGP dest pe extension to the file name USBDisk RAMDisk ESSS 1 ll 1 l If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When data stored in scene group 3 is saved with the file name LABEL SGP in the IMGO1 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned Command S SIRISIAIVIE 3 x USBDisk2 x IMGO1 x LABEL SGP Response OJK R SYSDATA Acquires settings related to image logging Acquires settings related to current image logging lt Command format gt SIYISIDIAITIA Liolaig ilnja fe _ dentifier lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally 204 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Measurement valus Cr Parameters explanation Setting data Identifier 1 Set value 0 None Image Logging imageLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Folder name of image logging save e Save destination folder name one byte alphanumeric A imageLoggingDirectory destination character Prefix for image logging file name one byte Prefix for image logging file name imageLoggingHeader Alphanumeric characters 0 None Data Logging dataLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Name of destination folder for psc Save destination folder name one byte al
78. the RUN window is displayed whenever power to the controller is turned on Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 Lighting gradually gets darker if it is used for a long time so adjust judgement conditions periodically Without stopping a measurement in operation you can change judgement conditions for a processing unit set in a scene Reference Changing Judgement Conditions without Stopping Measurement p 93 Switching to the ADJUST Window 1 Tap Switch to ADJUST mode in the RUN window tool box Tod box Switch to ADJUST mode Enter simplified non stop adj lora LCD off gt Switches to the ADJUST window 76 ADJUST Window and RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual Performing Test Measurement Test whether the intended measurement processing can be performed with the current setting contents Look at test results and adjust the property settings of each processing unit Perform measurement according to the conditions set in the displayed scene 1 Display the Main screen ADJUST window 2 Forthe test conditions on the ADJUST window set the following items 0 5Scernes 0 Signal output OFF E it T E r rm e ec Ef Editfiow M Datasave Scene switch Maasure Camer Image input Setting item Description Place a check here when the measurement results on the ADJUST window are also Output to be output Remove the check when test measuremen
79. there is a response DATE Acquiring date and time Acquires the date and time from the internal calendar timer in the controller Command format Response format When processing is performed normally 190 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Second Minute L Hour Date Month u Year When processing is not performed normally ERI Parameters explanation The acquired date and time are output as a response Year 4 digits vearMonbas Tee digite i Date 2 digits Hour Minute Second Sd Hour 2 digits Minute 2 digits Second 2 digits Example When the current date and time is 08 30 2007 12 30 00 Command D A T E r Response Setting date and time Changes the date and time of the internal calendar timer in the controller Command format ix Second Minute Hour Date Month Year FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 191 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally When processing is not performed normally E FR es Parameters explanation Set the date and time Year 4 digits Year Month Date Hour Month 2 digits M
80. too big when tapping is done with the touch pen Camera image does not display Image is blurry Is the lens cap removed Is the camera cable connected correctly Is the lens aperture the maximum or the minimum Is the camera s shutter speed correct Is the lighting method correct Start up is slow Was the system connected to a LAN when started If the system is started while connected to a LAN startup may take a longer time During Operation Measurement results do not display on the monitor Are windows other than the Main screen the Edit Flow window etc displayed Are any setting windows open A setting window is defined to be a window that opens separately such as the Edit Flow window and the Scene Maintenance window FZ3 User s Manual FAQ 313 sexipueddy sexipueddy E The touch screen responds slowly Are you tapping the touch screen continuously and quickly If yes the response to operation may be delayed NG memory shortage is displayed in the Detail result area Does the number of specific processing items such as camera image input exceed the limit Reference About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used p 347 In the Image view setting of the Control area Image mode Positions and Sub image can not be changed E F Detail ulli Fillaring Judge OK F image display Image layout innana Aclive image Image number 0 n
81. uni D Camera Image Ingul The setting window for the selected unit appears 4 Change each processing unit Model parameter Search made Rotation ngle range Seart mode Stab 12 Fast 4 i Stable Prec 2 Fast gt Prec DP ud Registered figure Rectangle 5 Tap OK The setting window closes and the screen returns to the Main screen When changing judgement conditions for multiple processing units repeat steps Reference 3 p 39 to Reference 5 p 39 The changes are not yet reflected at this point Tap Transfer data in the toolbar on the Main screen The changes are reflected Egino Dali savt i Seene mieli ETHIMEUETT Tap Return to RUN mode in the toolbar on the Main screen FZ3 User s Manual Setting Operation Mode 39 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg The screen returns to the RUN window EX Borne swilcli sa Musneurre When Transfer data is executed the results of Trend Monitor and Expression etc are cleared 40 If the scene or scene group was switched or any setting of a processing unit was changed during operation using an external command the result is not yet reflected when you switch to the non stop adjustment window If non stop adjustment is performed after changing the scene group during operation scene group data may be overwritten against you
82. will turn OFF if it was turned ON DOO to 15 It will turn OFF if it was turned ON This does not change when the OR and DO signal is being cleared GATE Do not however clear the OR and DO signal when the GATE signal is turned ON The command will not be executed correctly Or the DO and GATE will not be output correctly Input signal Signal Function DIO Turns the command OFF DI1 Turns the command ON DI2 to 5 Turns the command OFF DI6 Turns the command ON FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 237 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw BuljedluNWWO pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey DI7 This is the trigger signal to clear the OR and DO signal After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 ON after an interval over 1 ms After checking that the OR or DO signal has turned OFF turn DI7 OFF and then turn DIO to 6 OFF Clears error by the parallel command starting the measurement Exiting the measurement OFF i fia RUN QO STEP input OFF d e LS LLbSKJ J jy XB KJ KLZL b BUSY ON Executing measurement OFF OR ON DO y Data OFF p GATE ON 0 Gate ON delay Output time OFF ERROR ON i A DIO 6 i I OFF L DI7 ON Output signal Signal Function RUN Turns ON when the controller is set to the RUN window Turns OFF in the ADJUST window This does not change when an error is being cleared READY Do not however clear the error
83. 0 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Bit 11 8 T 0011 0000 Set command 0001 0000 codes 3 0 Description gt 0000 Store response target command codes Response Bit area top channel 19 12 Ise 2 0001 0000 0011 3 0000 0000 0001 4 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 Clearing Measurement Values Clears all measurement values FZ3 User s Manual I e e Description 0000 Command code 0000 Response code Command execution result 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 165 0000 Store response target command codes seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Command PLC to controller Command area Command Bit DESCON top channel code 15 12 11 8 3 0 i 2 2010 0010 0000 0001 0000 Geteommand 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 19 12 dies 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 oand EU 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Saving in Controller js I TR e Stores the current system data and scene group in the controller Command PLC to controller Command area Command Bit top channel code 15 12 11 8 7 3 0 escri
84. 0 0000 Second data 0 to 59 Acquiring Version Information seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey Acquires the controller version information Command PLC to Controller Command area Command x Description top channel code 19 12 11 8 on i 2 3000 0011 0000 0000 0000 Set command 3 0040 0000 0000 0100 0000 codes 170 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area top channel Iso 5 0000 0000 0000 Acquires settings related to image logging Acquires settings related to image logging Command PLC to Controller yN I T e Description 0000 Command code 0000 Store response target command codes 0000 Response code Command execution result 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 Version information character string 0000 0000 Command Bit oe Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0100 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 Sets command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Specifies Identifier 0 and Identifier 1 Identifier 0 Specifies logging 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Identifier 1 Specifies the name of the 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 item to be acquired Refer to identifier 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 of non procedure command 0000 0000 0000 0000 pis Response Controller to PLC Response Bit T m 11 8 7 4 3 0 Description 3 Stores respon
85. 113 oo Buis gt Cures late Ed es oa A i A F Rep AU fut 4 O Repeat steps 5 to 8 to correct the setting values corresponding to all causes of false judgement 10 Select Execute batch measurement to confirm that no images are falsely judged If there are still falsely judged images repeat the same procedure until a re measurement finds no falsely judged images Note OK NG judgements can be changed by using Send to OK folder and Send to NG folder buttons In this case the changes will not be reflected until re measurement is performed Send to WG folder 114 Using NG Analyser FZ3 User s Manual oaving Loading Data FZ3 User s Manual This chapter explains the methods for saving and loading settings and image data i Reference Basic Knowledge about Data Saving p 116 i Reference Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory p 118 Reference Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device p 120 i amp Reference Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device p 122 Reference Copying Moving Files p 124 i Reference Loading Settings Data to Controller p 126 115 ejye Buipeo1 Dui eg eye Buipeo1 Bui eg o Basic Knowledge about Data Saving This section explains methods for saving and loading settings data and image data About Saving Areas The following saving areas can be used with this device Saving area Description m Settings data is saved in this area Data is he
86. 12 12 12 L Entire image is selected Note Time can only be used in the Result display processing item About OR Setting NOT Setting The OR setting NOT setting is used when multiple images are combined Areas with complex shapes can be drawn through combining figures and unnecessary parts can be excluded form the area Each time OR NOT ns s 1 is tapped the setting of the selected figure toggles between OR and NOT ESZS 1 1 1 1 W Images with only the NOT setting cannot be drawn Item Description OR Used when drawing a model or a region NOT wal Switching between OR and NOT occurs each time the button is tapped 344 Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual OR The selected figure is displayed with a dotted line in the OK color The selected figure is displayed with a dotted line in the NG color ROM The area outside of the NOT image is registered as the region Example The grey parts are measurement regions OPNS Tr n Image 1 down by OR a Image 3 down by OR FZ3 User s Manual When drawing multiple figures the entire area is registered as one region Setting Figures 345 sexipueddy About Number of Logging Images The maximum number of logging images I MAX that can be stored in the controller s memory varies depending on the type of the controller in use and the type and number of connected cameras For color cameras 0 3 camera DUM
87. 1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 PE CJ1M o o o CJ1W SCU41 V1 CS1W SCBxx V1 CS1W SCU21 V1 SYSMAC_CS1 CS1H CS1D CS1G CS1W SCU31 V1 SYSMAC CP1 E MS CP1W CIFO1 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Ethernet Interface ONE Model CPU name CPU CPU built in Ethernet IP name name port unit QO3UDECPU Q04UDECPU QO6UDECPU Q10UDECPU QnUDECPU Qt 3UDECPU Q20UDECPU Q26UDECPU QO3UDCPU Q04UDCPU QO6UDCPU Q10UDCPU Q13UDCPU Q20UDCPU Q26UDCPU Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU QJ71E71 100 jonucru Q01UCPU Q02UCPU ne Q00JCPU Q00CPU ene aotcPu E Q02CPU Q02HCPU Universal model MELSEC QnU QnUDCPU E performance QCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU MELSEC QnAS f Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 i series Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 150 About Connecting with External Devices FZ3 User s Manual Serial Interface Sons Museen CPU name CPU celia Se name name communication unit Q03UDECPU Q04UDECPU QO6UDECPU Q10UDECPU QnUDECPU Qt 3UDECPU Q20UDECPU Q26UDECPU ds Q06UDCPU Q10UDCPU MELSEC QnU QnUDCPU O43UDCPU Q20UDCPU Q26UDCPU QJ71C24N port ONUGBU Q00UJCPU QO00UCPU QJ71C24N R2 Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q00JCPU QO0CPU High Q02CPU Q02HCPU iom performance QCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU model Q25HCPU MELSEC QnAS Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 series Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 FZ3 User s Manual About Connecting with External Devices 151 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey So9IAe E UJ9
88. 20000 5003712 Upper Limits of Processing Item Parameters 351 sexipueddy o sexipueddy E About Memories Usable with FZ Series The following types of memory can be used with FZ On board memory This is the area where images are temporarily stored when logging images using the logging function This uses ring memory and if the maximum number of save images has been reached images are overwritten starting with the oldest This is cleared when the power is turned OFF RAMDisk Image logging file data logging file and capture images can be saved As this is memory inside the FZ3 files can be saved and read faster than using USB memory However capacity is a fixed 40 MB 256 MB for FZ3 9 OO H9 LIL Files saved in RAMDisk are cleared when the power is turned OFF Application memory This is a memory used for all applications This is a memory area that is used temporarily by applications By confirming available memory this provides a rough standard for confirming status while operating The user has no access to it Data memory FZ3 3 OO H3 OU FZ3 7 OO H7 ODO onl This is an area for holding current settings details of scene group data If this capacity is exceeded adding units and copying scenes cannot be performed in edit flow Available data memory can be confirmed from the system menu Reference Checking System Information System Information p 145 352 About Memories Usable with FZ Series FZ3 User
89. 5 10 5 5 100 IP address Setting value Factory default Description Set the IP address of the controller When Obtain an IP address automatically is selected the IP address of the controller will be automatically obtained When Use the following IP address is selected set the IP address subnet mask and the default gateway address Input the controller IP address 0 0 0 0 to Subnet mask a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 10 5 5 110 a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 10 5 5 1 Default gateway DNS server 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 Input the subnet mask address Input the default gateway address Input the DNS server address I O setting Input mode Normal This item cannot be changed Input form ASCII This item cannot be changed a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 65535 Output IP address Input Output port No Note 2 9600 9876 Input the output destination IP address Set the port No to use for data I O with the controller Set the same No as on the host side Note 1 It is not displayed if the communication module is set to Normal TCP Note 2 The initial setting value becomes 9876 only when the communication module is set to Normal TCP Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 3
90. 66eeeSe eM 32 2 3eeeeSSHHHMeHHmmmmenHmehyHHeeseeee 76 Switching to the ADJ UST WindOW rsrsssssssesenunnnnnnununnnnnnununnnnnununnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnn 76 Performing Test Measurement n eee eee eee eee ener eee e HHHHHSIHHHeeHeheeeegBg TT Key Points for Adjustment TL n 19 Stabilizing Measurement ee HH MIHI 19 Shortening Processing Time HMM MIHI 81 Arranging the RUN Window gg ve eee 9 eeeSee e e8eeeee c eem mInnHyeeHmmmm nmm IHeeHeeSHeeem 82 Displaying Multiple Windows Together T 82 Changing Display Contents 0nLm 83 Enlarging Measurement Images Zoom Images ow 87 Displaying Flow and Detailed Results e8BBgBv 668 48 4 eeee e 2eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 87 Switching the RUN Window to Fast View Mode Select RUN Mode 888 88 Changing Display Contents on the RUN WindowMeasurement Information Display Area 89 Changing Functions That Can Be Operatedfrom the RUN Window Tool Box 89 Useful Functions for Operation O 00Lw 90 Remeasuring Saved Images 0 ee m 90 Improving Adjustment Efficiency n 91 Changing Judgement Conditions without Stopping Measurement ete teeter etete tenes 93 Changing Regions as a Batch Shift area 0000 94 Monitoring Measurement Value Trends ee8BgMBgBg eee eeeeSeee9233eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 95 Logging Measurement Values and Measu
91. 9 to 999999999 9999 N Oto7 judgement condition 25 FN X10 Measurement of feature quantily Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N 20to7 for extraction condition ee a oe Getonly 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N 20to7 extraction condition ee Liu ud v dU Getonly 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N 20to7 extraction condition 101 Output coordinates Set Get Rel i 1 Before scroll 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get or he 1 OFF 120 Max color difference Set Get 0 to 359 121 Min color difference Set Get 0 to 359 124 Max brightness Set Get 0 to 255 125 Min brightness Set Get 0 to 255 0 OFF 126 Extract image Set Get t ON 0 Black 1 White 127 Background color Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 129 Reference X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 130 Reference Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 OFF 131 Inverse area Set Get t ON m 0 OFF 132 Filling up holes Set Get t ON 268 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 0 OFF 133 Outside trimming Set Get t ON 137 Label No Set Get 0 to 2499 146 Upper limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 147 Lower limit of the binary level Set Get 128 to 255 0 OFF 0 Measurement image 149 Image kind Set Get aan e 2 Selection color image 3 Binary image 150 Selection of multiple colors Set Get Hi 152 Label No for external reference Set Get 0 to 2499 153 Vertical horizontal width for line Set
92. 99 250 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 14 Sub region Number Y Get only 0 to 9 15 Sub region Pos X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 16 Sub region Pos Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get oi ibrati 0 OFF 1 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF E ES 136 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 144 Save registered model Set Get r ni T For color cameras 0 to 221 145 Upper limit of deviation Set Get DARAN TEE UM ue traen canas o 7 E En FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 251 Se qe eouaeJ9Jos JeuJo x3 5 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o 154 NG Sub region 155 156 setting Set Get 0 to 99 acquisition target 155 Enabled disabled of sub region Set Get 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Search 156 Measurement type of sub region Set Get 1 ColorData 1 No processing item 157 Display cursor position Set Get M S 158 Display cursor Sub region Pos Set Get x ST 159 Sub region margin Set Get 0 to 10 0 Not retained 165 Disabled region retention flag Set Get UM 1000 N I N 0 to 99 Correlation value of sub region Get only 0 to 100 For color cameras 0 000 to 219 9705 1100 N dt Deviation of sub region Get only For monochrome cameras 0 000 to N 0 to 99 127 000 ECM Search No Data name Set Get Data range cay 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgemen
93. 99 ms Focus 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 1 Measurement data Focus value Get only 0 to 255 103 Setting data Reflect to overall judgement Set Get A a 120 Setting data Focus value Lower limit Set Get 0 to 255 Iris No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 1 Judgement 0 Judge Get only PesulttOK 1 Judgement result NG 1 Measurement data Valid pixel Get only 0 to 100 2 Measurement data Average brightness Get only 0 to 255 3 Measurement data R average Get only 0 to 255 4 Measurement data G average Get only 0 to 255 5 Measurement data B average Get only 0 to 255 103 Setting data Reflect to overall judgement Set Get ra 120 Setting data Valid brightness range Lower limit Set Get 0 to 255 121 Setting data Valid brightness range Upper limit Set Get 0 to 255 122 Setting data Valid pixel Lower limit Set Get 0 to 100 123 Setting data Average brightness Lower limit Set Get 0 to 255 124 Setting data Average brightness Upper limit Set Get 0 to 255 125 Setting data R average Lower limit Set Get 0 to 255 294 Support measurement FZ3 User s Manual 126 Setting data R average Upper limit Set Get 0 to 255 127 Setting data G average Lower limit Set Get 0 to 255 128 Setting data G average Upper limit Set Get 0 to 255 129 Setting data B average Lower limit Set Get 0 to 255 130 Setting data B average Upper limit Set Get 0 to 255 FZ3 User s Manual Support me
94. 999 mmm 102 Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 263 Se qe eouaeJ9Jos JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 Xx3 o 120 Register the max color hue Set Get 0 to 359 121 Register the min color hue Set Get 0 to 359 122 Register the max color saturation Set Get 0 to 255 123 Register the min color saturation Set Get 0 to 255 124 Register the max color brightness Set Get 0 to 255 125 Register the min color brightness Set Get 0 to 255 126 Extract image Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 127 Baekero tid Color Set Get 0 Black 1 White 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 0 OFF 1 Fill profile 2 Filling up holes 0 OFF 1 ON 0 to 999999999 9999 0 to 99999 0 to 99999 0 to 999999999 9999 0 to 999999999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 141 Upper limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 142 Lower limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 0 Measurement image 144 Image kind Set Get Poo Mage 2 Selection color image 3 Binary image l 0 Multiple selections disabled 145 Multiple selections Set Get 1 Multiple selections enabled 0 Not used 160 N x 10 Flag N used for registered color Set Get 1 Used l 0 OR 161 N x 10 Flag N for registered color OR NOT Set Get 1 NOT 162 N x 10 Register the max color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 163 N x 10 Register the min
95. 9999 to 99999 9999 9 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 12 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 14 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 15 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 mm 120 Search mode Set Get Ei i 0 OFF 121 With rotation Set Get 1 ON 0 OFF 126 Stab CR 1 to 15 128 Stab PT 1to5 0 OFF 134 Sub pixel Set Get 1 ON 135 Candidate Point Level Set Get 0 to 100 136 Upper limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 Lower limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 257 Se qe soudJejoy JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o 140 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 141 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 142 Upper limit of the corr Set Get 0 to 100 143 Lower limit of the corr Set Get 0 to 100 Edge Position No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 101 Output Coordinates Set Get A db 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Edge color specification Set Get A ar pedeeionmaie soet f caro 136 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Monochrome edge detecti
96. 99999 9999 to 999999999 9999 147 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 148 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 149 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 150 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 151 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 152 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 153 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 154 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 155 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 156 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 157 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 158 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 159 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 160 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 161 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 162 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 163 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 164 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 165 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 166 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 167 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N o 298 Output result FZ3 User s Manual Fieldbus Data Output 0 No judgement unmeasured Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to 12 poate Getonly _ 2147483 648 to 2147483 647 Data 7 150 Output format Set Get 5 Bis Ron 1 Floating point FZ3 User s Manual Output result 299 Se qe soudJajoy JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJo Xx3 o Display result Result Display 0 No judgement unmeasured j dd 1 Judgement result OK Display Image File 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120
97. 99999 ms CMD FLG and BUSY are forcibly turned off FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 175 seoi eq jeuiex3 uyim Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse seoi eq jeuiex3 uyim Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse Data Output Command area ON PLC to Fz3 DSA FF J ON a Response area GATE FZ3to PLC d OFF i Output area ON ar FZ3 to PLC DATAOG 7 Output data O to 7 176 1st data output 2nd data output 1 e Data output request bits 1 1 Turn on DSA from the PLC and issue a data output request 2 The FZ3 outputs data After output is complete GATE is turned on 3 The PLC confirms that GATE has turned on loads data and then the DSA is turned off 4 The FZ3 confirms that the DSA has turned off and then GATE is turned off After measurement completion the DSA is turned on from the PLC and the next data output is requested 1 If DSA is not turned on within the retry interval 0 to 999999 ms after the processing flow has been adjusted to the order of data output units the GATE will be forcibly turned off and data output will end Use caution as data will be deleted 2 If the DSA is not turned off within the retry interval 0 to 999999 ms GATE is forcibly turned off and output is ended Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Command Details Command to
98. 999999 9999 12 Expression result of Expression 7 hs to 0 Unmeasured 1 OK 1 NG 120 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 121 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 122 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 123 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 124 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 125 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 126 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 127 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 128 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 129 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 130 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 131 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 132 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 133 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 134 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 135 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Line Regression No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Line Param 0A Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 6 Line Param 0 B Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Line Param 0 C Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Line Param 1A Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Line Param 1 B Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Line Param 1 C Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Cross point X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 12 Cross point Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Support measurement 289 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJo X3 o 13 Angle Get only 0 0000 to 180 0000 14 Point X Get
99. C Image Display Area Displays camera images figures and coordinates d Zoom Browser Area Zooms in and out from the displayed image FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 19 uoneJedo eJojeg Checking System Configuration This product is a vision sensor for performing image processing measurement through a controller of objects photographed using a camera By connecting an external device such as a PC measurement commands can be input and measurement results can be output from the external device Basic Configuration of FZ3 Series 1 The touch pen is a controller accessory 2 FZ SC2M and FZ S2M cannot be connected with the FZ3 3 9 9 FZ3 H3 H series 3 Lenses for small size cameras are required for small size 0 3 megapixel cameras 4 FZ SC5M FZ S5M cannot be connected with the FZ3 3 9 9 FZ3 H3 P series Reference For details on connector specifications etc see the Operator s Manual Setup of each model 20 Checking System Configuration FZ3 User s Manual Description of Model specific Functions Functions added after software version 3 xx Operation mode Thanks to the dual core CPU different operation modes can be set to meet different purposes of use A desired operation mode can be selected from Parallel operation high speed mode Single line high speed mode High speed logging mode Non stop adjustment mode and Multi line random trigger mode Reference Setting Operation Mode p
100. Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface p 223 Are windows other than the Main screen the Edit Flow window etc displayed Are there any setting windows open A setting window is defined as a window that opens separately such as the Edit Flow window and the Scene Maintenance window Signals cannot be output to external devices Is the trigger signal input Are the cables connected correctly Is the signal cable disconnected You can check the communication status in the Confirmation window Reference Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface p 223 Is test measurement being performed Data cannot be output to external devices during test measurement About Serial Interface RS 232C 422 Connection No communication available Are the cables connected correctly Are the communication specifications of the external devices compatible with the controller You can check the communication status in the Confirmation window Reference Checking Communication Status Non procedure p 184 The controller works fine initially but there is not response after a while Is the buffer memory of the PC full Please verify if data can be received correctly based on current settings Data cannot be saved Are the communication specifications of the external devices compatible with the controller Is Flow control in communication specifications set to None To save data set Flow control to
101. Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command to Response Command area PLC to FZ3 CMD CODE Command code CMD PARAM Command parameters CMD EXE Command execution bits Response area FZ3 to PLC CMD CODE Command code BUSY Command execution bts during execution RES CODE Response code RES DATA Response data CMD FLG Command completion bits o hifi iis ee 0 8 LI s Eme annann mam E b TEI um w o Am Um WO eee meam am mom wm E i LJ L L a E LJ a a a a PI z z LJ LJ a a a Seiten oe oou Peewee om mmm mom cae Pen o onm od i m CET w m m CELE 2 ites se oe mmm ee ee amu mms m uf mom oo omm zaag aw te PtP PPP PPR Pee LI LI LI 2 3 i415 Cr CO LEELLE Ce ELELEE Beta reerae st ttt eet ee eee ee we ee I 1 CMD CODE and CMD PARAM are set from the PLC and then CMD EXE is turned on The F Z3 receives an execution instruction 2 When the FZ3 receives the execution instruction BUSY is turned on and the command is executed 3 When the FZ3 completes execution CMD CODE RES CODE and RES DATA are set and then CMD FLG is turned on 4 The PLC confirms that CMD FLG has turned on and then CMD EXE is turned off 5 The FZ3 confirms that CMD EXE has turned off and then CMD FLG and BUSY are turned off 1 If CMD EXE is not turned off within the retry interval 0 to 9
102. Communication specifications RS 232C 422 ADJUST window 74 Non procedure 109 Angle range 319 Conditional Branch External Reference 296 Anti Color Shading External Reference 286 Confirmation Non procedure 184 Arc 340 Confirmation Parallel 223 ASCII data 211 Coordinates 323 Auto Re meas 91 Copying a scene 67 Available application memory 145 Copying files 124 Available data memory 146 Copying scene group 70 Correlation value 318 B Correlation value Terminology Explanation Background suppression External Reference 327 283 Create shortcut 138 Barcode External Reference 277 Crosshair Cursor 342 Binary data 212 BKDLOAD 187 D BKDSAVE 188 Data Logging External Reference 293 Data Output External Reference 297 C Data save 28 118 Calculation External Reference 289 DATASAVE 190 Calibration Terminology Explanation 326 DATE 190 Calibration External Reference 290 Date Verification External Reference 276 Camera connection 128 Date time setting 131 Candidate point Terminology Explanation 326 Default gateway 154 182 Candidate point level 319 Defect External Reference 272 Capture 105 Deleting a scene 67 Captured images save destination 106 Detection point Terminology Explanation 326 Changing a scene name 68 DI Branch External Reference 296 Changing scene group name 71 DISPCOND 192 Character code table 350 Display Image File External Reference 300 Character input 333 Display Last NG Image External Reference Character I
103. Cut External Reference 287 Handshaking 232 High speed logging mode 21 Image layout 82 Image Logging 99 Image Logging External Reference 293 Image mode 84 IMGSAVE 194 Initialization 27 Input format Parallel 225 Intelligent camera Terminology Explanation 325 Inter camera setting 128 IP address 153 182 Iris External Reference 294 Label Data External Reference 267 Labeling External Reference 265 Labeling External Reference 268 Language setting 131 LCD Off 28 Line 337 Line Regression External Reference 289 Logging 102 Logging image clearing 104 Logging image saving 122 MAX 351 MEASURE 195 Measure setting 130 Measurement flow Terminology Explanation 326 Measurement Image Switching External Reference 247 Measuring processing time 81 Model Terminology Explanation 327 Model Dictionary External Reference 277 Mouse 25 Moving files 124 Multi line random trigger mode 37 Multi input 239 Multiple selection 64 NG analyzer 108 No of image logging images 346 Noise level 321 Non procedure 179 Non stop adjustment 93 Non stop adjustment mode 38 Normal mode 75 NOT setting 344 Operation mode 21 136 Optical diagram 305 OR setting 344 Output coordinates 323 Output format Non procedure 211 Output polarity 222 Panorama External Reference 287 Parallel Data Output External Reference 297 Parallel interface 223 Parallel Judgement Output External Reference 298 Parallel operation High speed mode 32 P
104. DATA1 Output data 1 4 5 DATA2 Output data 2 6 7 DATA3 Output data 3 8 9 DATA4 Output data 4 10 11 DATAS Output data 5 12 13 DATA6 Output data 6 14 15 DATA7 Output data 7 Signal Signal name Function Outbitdata The data set in the output processing items is output DATAO 7 0 ae When there are multiple processing items data is overwritten to this area while handshaking is performed 218 Control Output through EtherNet IP FZ3 User s Manual Command Control EtherNet IP This section explains each command used in EtherNet IP Measurement control command 3 Function References Scene control command Command area top channel 3 2 Function References 0020 1000 Acquires scene number Reference Details p 167 0020 2000 Acquires scene group number Reference Details p 167 0030 1000 Switching scenes Reference Details p 168 0030 2000 Switches the scene group number Reference Details p 168 Settings acquisition change command Command area top channel 3 Function References 0040 1000 Acquires unit data Reference Details p 169 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N 0040 4000 Acquires setting data related to image logging Reference b Details p 171 0050 1000 Sets unit data Reference Details p 172 0050 4000 Changes settings related to image logging Reference Details p 173 p 174 0070 Saves image data Reference Details p 174 D
105. DE Cancel The measurement results are deleted Clearing Saved Images Clears all of the logging images that are currently logged in the controller 1 On the Main screen tap the Measure menu Clear logging image A confirmation window is displayed 2 Tap OK 104 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Note If you want to keep the logged images as files save the logged images to the USB memory device by tapping Data Save to file Logging image before clearing them Reference amp Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device p 122 Capturing Screens The contents displayed in the monitor screen can be captured Saved images can be loaded into the PC and pasted to documents ESSZS 1 l Capture takes a few seconds and measurement cannot be performed at this time 1 Open the measurement manager bar at the bottom right of the Main screen and tap Capture l Fimage view setting l kaga layout 1 image Active image Image number 0 mage mode Freeze hui Positions CON a OFF Sub image The same operation can also be performed by tapping the System menu Screen capture Screen capture When capture is performed from the measurement manager bar in multi line random trigger mode it always saves to the destination set for line O About capture image files This section explains the format and file names for capture images With fact
106. DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOU 9 Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 1 4 3 0 2 0100 0000 0000 0000 Commande ce 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 Stores response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Saves image data Saves image data Command PLC to controller Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0100 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0111 0000 Sets command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Specifies the image data No 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 l For details of Image data number and ui 0000 0000 0000 0000 Save destination refer to the 0000 0000 0000 0000 non procedure command IMGSAVE 0000 0000 0000 0000 command section Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0100 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0111 0000 Stores response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Data Output PLC Link Either fixed point output or floating point output can be selected for data output Reference Data Output p 418 Timing Chart PLC Link This section explains timing charts for command response output and measurement commands 174 Communicating through Serial
107. Download the EDS file from OMRON s website When the 2 line random trigger mode is used with the FZ3 900 series use the EDS file that corresponds to the line to be used Specify different addresses for the sending and receiving areas of line O and line 1 After the tag data link is set the controller automatically restarts to reflect the setting 1 On the Main screen tap System menu Communication EtherNet IP The EtherNet IP window is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Control Output through EtherNet IP 215 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Buroeuuo JO spouse 216 2 Set the following items EtherNet IP Dutput control Moe s Output period ms al Output time ms TB Timeout s hee j On Cancel Setting value Setting item E Description Set whether or not to synchronize with an external device when outputting data None The controller outputs measurement results without Output None synchronizing with external devices control Handshaking Reference For data output without handshaking p 220 Handshaking The controller outputs measurement results while synchronized with external devices Reference For data output with handshaking p 220 Output 2 0 to 5000 0ms Valid only when Output control is set to None Set the cycle period 10 0ms by which measurement results are output
108. EO OT UON RE ee RC P d at 20 Description of Model specific Functions RUE RCRUM Teri E a eT ee PR ROO OT eM C TU ON NER eee ee CN ek ee 21 Preparing Controllers and Cameras Ws ERGRGa RR REX PER Ga EK RARE AE PE REN RG LKREZaERERARE CEA EE REN ROR TES EAS SERERE REF ENS 23 Preparing Controllers TUN UNTER NELLO ee INI ee eA ee CREE UENIT LEITET TTE T 23 Adjusting Cameras Spin 2 RU a OU OR RC E ANC eR Ee RIC eR Ce Ce Ee RN ERE Ee RON IRURE UL Cee eee OON D ORE RN RC RN 23 Intelligent Camera with Lighting Function Ser ICRC T LEER EUREE ROLE TEPC OER CR ETE REE Cr rE er ee 24 Input Operations Sg Un 6 TIRE A CER Ee Ce ERE OATS R URN ERC eT ONUS RR RON Ce EMEC Ee A CAN EN MCR OR OON RR RC REN CU RN RR 25 Operation of Touch Pen eT rm CEP a Ree ee 25 Basic Operation of Mouse and Trackball Tee ee CCELO TT ETT REE CAEL ERE TE TER TCAD CTC Ee TCT ee RR NEN es 25 Returning Controller to Factory Settings TEC eR Te Le ee Ce CEE EE COCR ROR Oe E aT an RE Re ree 27 Initializing Controller System Initialization E A ee ee A RR E ORO RC RE DR E RR A ar 27 Restarting Controller System Restart S EE LT ONU eC ee CURE Cee ee 0 UR QR CR ee eee A ON EUN CN 27 Saving Settings and Turning Power Off WARE a a aaa a a a a a a a a NaS SS aa a ae 28 Turning Off LCD xac EEA E REN RR CRT eT ee ee See E EA A RAE E EE S E NE ee ee ee eee E RE C 28 Setting Operation Mode EC Odio dote omo acaba ECR eT Eee SECA AA EE EA E eee E ee A A EEE 30 Operation Mode Selection Guidelines Tee ECC Ee TT
109. EOM Seach Ee Digi meant Chri capter lage Portion Hi Eie Pann m bii fiiia Scars Eige HE Dii meis menos a Pus labe orar Labs Dun ydp r m di Ti HO eed MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E The property setting window is displayed Set detailed conditions The displayed contents vary depending on the processing item 7 Set conditions The displayed contents vary depending on the processing item Search Modal Region setiine Dekection point Ret position Hensuremeni Dukpul parameler E HCS aasuremani condition Sub nixel Candidate LY Wuitleia output Detal LV sort senditian 7 Search We 48 Creating a Scene FZ3 User s Manual Processing ltem Selection Guidelines Processing items for performing measurement are provided with this product Application oriented measurement can be configured by combining processing items or changing the settings of processing items The method for searching for processing items appropriate to the target measurement is shown here Reference Selecting Measurement Processing Items Using a Chart p 49 Reference Selecting Measurement Processing Items According to the Measurement Method and Purpose p 56 selecting Measurement Processing Items Using a Chart Select processing items appropriate to the target using the chart Item References Performing position campensalot Torobjec
110. Eject button is displayed Ferunirs wheal Avsllable application memory i 1828203152 byte Drive Capscity free total E 378 WB 879 WB Fiw 1 78 GB 1 9 GB e eq Buipeo1 Bui eg P 3 To remove the USB memory tap the Eject button When the USB memory can be removed E drive removed safely If the removal failed wait until the USB is no longer accessed and then try removing the USB again ESZS 1 Absolutely do not remove the USB memory while the USB memory is being accessed as this can result in a serious malfunction FZ3 User s Manual How to Use USB Memory FZ3 9 H9only 123 eye Buipeo1 Bui eg o Files can be copied or moved between the controller RAM Disk and USB memory Images and data saved on the RAM Disk are deleted if the power is turned off If you wish to keep these images and data copy or move them to the USB memory The types of files that can be copied moved are as follows Settings data scene data scene group data system data Logging Image Logging data Plug a USB memory device into the controller NO On the Main screen tap Data Save to file The Save to File window is displayed 3 Tap Copy files and select the file or folder to copy or move Logging image lect File Select folder AMD skew Select file nase Copies or moves multiple files in a folder Tap and specify the sourc
111. Ellipse 0x0020 Circle 0x0040 Wide circle 0x0080 Arc 0x0100 Wide arc 0x0200 Polygon Set to 0 if no figures are acquired 1000 100 x N Figure N type N 0 to 9 N 0 to 9 1004 4 400 x N Figure N drawing t mode Get only Figure N drawing mode N 0 to 9 N 0 to 9 en nian Figure N data 0 to 20 J Get only The amount of valid data differs with data type EE AR a Set to 0 if disabled or no figures are acquired N 0 to 9 N 0 to 9 g TE Trend Monitor 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Getonly 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 EN gt 7 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 8 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 9 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 10 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 103 id QE Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF judgement 121 ZPPer IMI OLME 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 judgement So qe 9Uu 1 J Y JeuJo X3 o Lower limit of the 122 jadaement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 123 Warning upper limit Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 124 Warning lower limit Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 292 Support measurement FZ3 User s Manual Upper limit of the display 125 nee Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 126 mike HIF ORMOISPIEY il Seige 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 127 Inu OIN dedo Set Get 1 to 1000000 display range l 0 Displa
112. G Processing time Displays the time required for the measurement process Status display Displays the scene group number scene number external output status and image mode for the currently displayed scene C Toolbar Commonly used functions appear in the toolbar Edit flow The Edit Flow window is displayed Addition and deletion of processing units and switching of the processing sequence is performed in the Edit Flow window Data save Setting data is saved into the internal flash memory in the controller Make sure to save when settings have been modified Scene switch To switch a scene group or scene Measure Stop meas Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual Starts stops measurement Switch to RUN mode Switches to the RUN window d Image Display Area Displays the measured image 1 Property setting buttons Displays the name of the currently selected processing item Moving to the property setting window can be done by tapping here e Control Area Displays Test measurement Flow Detail result and Image display Test measurement Use when test measurement conditions and images that have been acquired are used for remeasurement 7 Tet Were One Contino red Sam A mina nc 1 _ Flow Displays the judgement results for the flow and each unit lak AC umil T sareh Hexb AI unil u OF r dg Foal il iar P g i i amp 3
113. G 0 Camera O 1 100 Select camera Set Get 1 Camera0 1 2 2 Camera0 1 2 3 0 1 x 4 placement wt Arment sete ora pacaman 102 Select Image Set Get 0 to 3 103 Amount of parallel movement Set Get For 0 3 megapixel cameras 640 to 640 X For 2 megapixel cameras 1600 to 1600 Amount of parallel movement Y For 2 megapixel cameras 1200 to 1200 m 0 Not drawn 107 Flag for drawing image frame Set Get M ORA 108 Flag for drawing characteristic Set Get 0 Not drawn points 1 Drawn For 0 3 megapixel cameras 480 to 480 104 Set Get FZ3 User s Manual Compensate image 287 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJ9 Xx3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo Xx3 o 109 Flag for executing brightness Set Get 0 Not executed correction 1 Executed 110 Brightness correction Set Get 0103 reference image No 112 Number of valid images Get 0 to 4 ff i f 200 Foremost window image Set Get Ped number of foremost window of cameras Polar Transformation No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120 Cut out angle Set Get 0 to 359 122 Set Get 0to 360 123 Disp transferred Set Get 0 Image prior to transfer Image 1 Image after transfer 288 Compensate image FZ3 User s Manual oupport measurement Calculation 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 2o EXoresetoti esa cxpresstohios 999999999 9999 to 999
114. Height of circumscribed rectangle Extraction condition Set Get 10 Upper left X coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 11 Upper left Y coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 12 Perimeter 13 Circularity 14 Major axis of rotating rectangle 15 Minor axis of rotating rectangle 16 Radius of inscribed circle 17 Radius of circumscribed circle 18 Number of holes ONOnNRWNM AO 601 Nx10 N 0 to 2 cd Upper limit of extraction condition Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 ae Lower limit of extraction condition Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 OFF Number of labels Area Gravity X Gravity Y Elliptic axis angle Elliptic major axis Elliptic minor axis Ratio for flat approximate ellipse 9 Width of circumscribed rectangle 10 Height of circumscribed rectangle 11 Upper left X coordinate of circumscribed rectangle Set Get 12 Upper left Y coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 13 Perimeter 14 Circularity 15 Major axis of rotating rectangle 16 Minor axis of rotating rectangle 17 Ratio of rotating rectangle 18 Center of inscribed circle X 19 Center of inscribed circle Y 20 Radius of inscribed circle 21 Center of circumscribed circle X 22 Center of circumscribed circle Y 23 Radius of circumscribed circle 24 Number of holes ONOnNRWNM AO 700 N x 10 N 0 to 7 Judgement condition Se qe soudJajJoy JeuJo x3 5 0 ON 1 OFF 701 N x 10 Display sel
115. Im ecl Tj 1 Moves to the top processing unit with an NG error 2 Moves to the next processing unit with an NG error Detail result The detailed measurement results of the processing units selected in the measurement flow are displayed as text FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 13 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg LISTE ET n Image display Sets the display method for the Image Display area Aciiwve image image number 0 Con more 1 2 1 Capture Saves the content displayed on the monitor as an image Reference Set the save destination for captured images p 106 2 LCD Off Displayed only with LCD integrated controllers Turns off power to the LCD monitor Tap the bottom of the monitor screen to turn on power to the LCD monitor again Layout of Main Screen RUN Window This window is used during operation 14 Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual 0 5cene group ll 0 Scene D THe mp pie da i Br imag Lada towstchi bn ADREST oe Enio simplifuni non stop adi d Capt e LCD ot gt a Measurement Information Display Area 0 5cene group 0 1 Overall judgement Displays a scene s overall judgement result OK NG The judgement results for each processing unit are displayed in the Control area 2 Processing time Displays the time required for the measurement process 3 Scene Group Name Scene Name Displ
116. Jojeg uoneJedo eJojeg saving Settings and Turning Power Off Before turning off power to the controller perform the following operations to save the data that you have set The controller loads scene data from the flash memory each time during start up Therefore if the power is turned off without saving data to the flash memory any changes made will not be saved 1 On the Main screen ADJUST window tap Data save in the toolbar to save the setting data i imei bo ELN uk 2 Exit after powering off the controller Note Data to be saved Scene data and system data are saved in the controller Logging images and data saved in the RAMDisk are not saved Perform any of the following procedures to keep this data Copy data saved in the RAMDisk to the USB memory Reference Copying Moving Files p 124 Change the save destination of logging data to USB memory Reference amp Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device p 122 When using the scene group function The scene data set in Scene group 0 is saved in the controller The scene data from scene groups 1 to 31 is saved to the USB memory and overwrites previous saved data For FZ3 9 OO H9 OLD all data are saved in the controller Turning Off LCD This function is specific to FZ3 300 700 900 series LCD integrated controllers Turn off the LCD only without turning off the controller 1 Open the measurement manager bar at the bottom righ
117. M saving folder automatically created and image files are divided by scene and Unchecked by scene saved Switch Checked If checked OK NG folders are automatically created and image saving folder ie audae Unchecked files are divided by scene and saved FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 99 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg v uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o Save to memory file setting example and save destination Example of setting Destination Folder name USBDisk Saving will be performed as follows for the settings Prefix image example on the left Switch saving folder by scene OK image save destination Checked USBDisk S000 000 OK image_ Measurement ID IFZ Switch saving folder by judge NG image save destination Checked USBDisk S000 002 NG image_ Measurement ID IFZ 4 Set the image logging priority conditions This setting is only valid when Save to memory file is selected in the image logging saving conditions When the measurement takt time is short time lag may occur with writing from the controller memory to the RAMDisk or USBDisk and temporary absences of free capacity in the controller memory may occur Select whether logging or measurement has priority at these times Legging priority Lorcinr O Measureaen Setting Setting item nione Description default When there is no free capacity in the controller memory s
118. OJKISR When processing is not performed normally E IRI Parameters explanation Scene No Specifies the scene No to be read 0 to 31 200 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path File name of Only files that are under the following systems and have an SCN extension can be read scene data USBDisk RAMDisk ESZN h h 8 If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When LABEL SCN in the IMGO1 folder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded to the controller as scene 2 Command SICINILIOIAIDI 12 Y USBDisk2 Y IMG01 Y LABEL1 SCN Response OIK 8s SCNSAVE Saves scene data Command format isiciNiSJAVE fm Save destination scene No max 2 digits Response format When processing is performed normally OIKER When processing is not performed normally IE Ra Parameters explanation Scene No Specifies the scene No to save 0 to 31 Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be sure to attach an SCN Save destination extension to the file name
119. OK folder are shown first followed by the results in the NG folder Green indicates OK while red indicates NG maa a a a a m camera maze Inpit Edge Position i 2 Ede Position amp Position Compensation nese results idged as WG n The LI folder and results mcdged es Ok in tre NG foldes become the adjustment target J i i 1 q J T Results in the OK folder Haesulte in the NG fidet Adjust the setting values of each unit until no images are falsely judged 6 Select the processing item to be adjusted and tap Details of unit 112 Using NG Analyser FZ3 User s Manual In the above example Search becomes the adjustment target OCamers Imeze Input 1 Eder Posion 2t ge Posilion d Poa dion Compensation Quem oo Buis gt The correlation valuo early ucged as NO D rrar Position X Position Y Angle Correct the iudaerment condilian za that hese images are iudged as Nu l I i l l I I I I l l i A eee LL LLLLLLLLL LL Results in the OF folder Resultas in the Ni folder 8 Adjust the processing item by referring to the displayed content In the following example Correlation values are clearly lower on some screens Based on the revealed cause of false judgement use the Set up Std and Set up Select buttons to change the setting values of the processing unit FZ3 User s Manual Using NG Analyser
120. Parameters explanation Scene group No Specifies the scene group No to be read 0 to 31 Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path dad Only files that are under the following systems and have an SGP extension can be read scene group d USBDisk RAMDisk portent ccc Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When LABEL SGP in the IMGO1 folder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded to scene group 3 Command SIGIRILIOJAID 13 YUSBDisk2 IMGO1 LABEL1 SGP lt Response gt OIKER Note For the USB memory drive see Reference amp About USB Drive Names p 116 SGRSAVE Saves scene group data Command format ISIGIRISJAIVIEL l imd cave destination Scene group No max 2 digits Response format When processing is performed normally FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 203 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey OIKER When processing is not performed normally E R e Parameters explanation Scene group Specifies the scene group No to save 0 to 31 No Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path NS Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be
121. R CR eR EE Ce eee Men ee ee a eee a RR ee ee oe 56 Editing Processing Units in Scenes nnn 63 Switching Scenes and Scene Groups RU CUT A eT Cee ERE ECL ee ICC Re Cee ee YII 65 Switching Scenes Keer ee eee CRE TT TRE TR TERE C TT CCE TCE TRE ET ee ee RET eR eT eee ee eR ee ere 65 Switching Scene Groups S RICO c e RO eT eC Ce ee TERRE EC CR ee Tee RC D ee re ee ee ee ee ee n CC ee ee ee 65 Editing Scenes ee LCR ee EE PC ee UN UR M OD RC A CR EORR ON n De NR RA RR OU ONE Reve PRT eon neon oe mee en own ae eee 67 Copying a Scene Shaw wa RR er Ter eT EET eee EE RE TPE Ee ETE ee TPR ee ee eee 67 Clearing a Scene TT CRMER RCN CCR CRC ROCCE ERS EER eS ee ER Ce ERT RO oe ee ee PINE Cee aT eRe ER CR DOR WR Ne Nee a 67 FZ3 User s Manual 1 Renaming a Scene and Adding a Description eRe eC ES ERE OCR RN ee Ce ee ee oe Re eet 68 Editing Scene Groups on 70 Copying a Scene Group n nnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnSNNNASENENNNESENSESESHSMNENSNHESHNASESESENENENSESHSNASESENMNSNENSEENENENENNOD 70 Deleting a Scene Group T0 SQ 71 Renaming a Scene Group TT 0 LG n 11 3 Performing Test Measurement Starting Operation 73 ADJUST Window and RUN Window nHnBng g9 ee e s68e4 2 eeeee e eeeeSeeeeeeeHHHeSeSeeeeeeeeemHHe T4 ADJUST WindOW mmm IIIS 14 RUN WINGOW e e e M HHHmmmnHIHHIMMM RHHHMRSHRIHHMHMH MMSHH SHRHeRHHHHH HeHHeHHIRIHMSHMMMH AMHMHHHHHHhnn T4 Switching to the RUN Window ccttttttst teres Mg geesg 6e
122. Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 142 Upper limit of the minimum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 143 Lower limit of the minimum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 144 Upper limit of the edge position X Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 145 Lower limit of the edge position X Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 146 Upper limit of the edge position Y Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 147 Lower limit of the edge position Y Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 148 Upper limit of the long distance Max Set Get 0 to dist X MAX Y MAX 149 Lower limit of the long distance Max Set Get 0 to dist amp MAX Y MAX 150 Upper limit of the short distance Max Set Get 0 to dist X MAX Y MAX 151 Lower limit of the short distance Max Set Get 0 to dist amp MAX Y MAX 152 Upper limit of the deviation Set Get 0 to dist amp MAX Y MAX 153 Lower limit of the deviation Set Get 0 to dist X MAX Y MAX 154 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 155 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 156 Upper limit of the lost point Set Get 0 to 100 157 Lower limit of the lost point Set Get 0 to 100 158 Monochrome edge detection mode Set Get n x n T 0 96 l 0 OFF 166 Measure type Set Get 0 Projection 1 Derivation 167 Andi s IRA 0 Do not fix number of area divisions dist X MAX Y MAX sqrt X MAX X MAX Y MAX Y MAX Scan Edge Width Aic Oo NN Data name Judge Edge width Max
123. Set Get 0 to 2500 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 265 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 x3 5 So qe eoua8J9Jos JeuJo x3 o 140 Upper limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 141 Lower limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 142 Upper limit of the gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 143 Lower limit of the gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 144 Upper limit of the gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 145 Lower limit of the gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 146 Upper limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 for monochrome cameras only 147 Lower limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 for monochrome cameras only 148 nay image Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON for monochrome cameras only 0 Measurement image 149 Image kind Set Get ru doge 2 Selection color image 3 Binary image 0 Multiple selections disabled 150 Multiple selections Set Get 1 Multiple selections enabled 0 Not used 160 N x 10 Flag N used for registered color Set Get 1 Used l 0 OR 161 N x 10 Flag N for registered color OR NOT Set Get 1 NOT 162 N x 10 Register the max color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 163 N x 10 Register the min color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 164 N x 10 Register the max color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 165 Nx 10 Register the min color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 166 Nx 10 ue the max color brightness Set Get 0 to 255 167 N x 10 Register the min col
124. The soft keyboard is displayed 3 Set Old password and New password Use 16 characters or less to Input words 4 Tap OK The display returns to the Password Setting window 3 Tap OK A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap OK Paskwird ix changed The Password Setting window closes mportant 00 0 ll 1 V Please contact us if you forget the passwords you set oetting a Network Drive Network Drive Setting Set a network drive Register the shared folder on a network drive with a shared name The network drive connected to the Select File Folder window of the FZ software will be displayed 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Network drive setting FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 143 ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu 5 2 Select the shared name to be registered and tap Edit ebwork drive setting T Uu V Ww v Fa 3 Enter the information to be allocated to the network drive shared name such as the shared folder user name and password Network drive setting Share name Shared folder Example Wserverishare P User name Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o Password OK Cancel Set value Setting item Factory Description default This is the name to be recognized by the controller as a network drive Only 1 unit can be connected For FZ3 L35 H FZ3 3H O FZ3 7 U Share name
125. User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 207 SODIAVC E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OIKER When processing is not performed normally Parameters explanation Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be sure to attach an INI Save destination extension to the file name USBDisk RAMDisk ESZS 1 lLL L1 If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When data stored in scene group 3 is saved with the file name LABEL INI in the IMGO1 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned Command Response OJK r UNITDATA or UD Acquiring processing unit parameters and measurement values The set parameters and measurement values for the processing units set in the scene currently being used are acquired lt Command format gt UIN MOA TTT T Extemal reference table No Processing unit No max 4 digits Response format When processing is performed normally 208 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User
126. View Setting p 137 Changing Functions That Can Be Operated from the RUN Window Tool Box Functions that can be operated from the RUN window tool box can be changed Reference Setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut p 138 FZ3 User s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 89 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o Useful Functions for Operation Remeasuring Saved Images Images from when measurement including test measurement was performed can be saved Remeasurement can be performed with saved images after conditions are adjusted in order to check whether the adjustment is appropriate The logging function is used for saving images Reference Setting Logging Conditions Logging Setting p 98 Images that can be remeasured include images saved in the controller and images saved in USB memory 1 In the Control area of the Main screen tap Test measurement 2 Tap Select image 0 Scene group 0 Scene 0 S Signal output OFF Through Edit flaw E Datasave Scene switrh Output Continuous meas 2H 5 Vct i leage Input Setting item Description File Specify images saved in the USB memory or in the RAMDisk Logging image Specify images that are logged in the controller memory 4 The selected image is displayed at the lower left of the FileExplorer screen When there are multiple camera images in a file as
127. Vision Sensor FZ3 Series User s Manual Cat No Z290 E1 04 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the FZ3 Series This manual provides information regarding functions performance and operating methods that are required for using the FZ3 Series When using the FZ3 Series be sure to observe the following e The FZ3 Series must be operated by personnel knowledgeable in electrical engineering To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly to deepen your understanding of the product Please keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to whenever necessary Contents 1 Before Operation L MH M a 9 Operation Flow MU IN EL eee EERE PAT CLUE RO RR ERE ERI CR EE Ee eR Rene LU IY E YII 10 Layouts of Screens Windows X ROC OR A CR ere TR A CR Ae ee ee EE ER eC RC OR Ee RRR ER Eee re RR RR AE 1 1 Layout of Main Screen ADJUST Window S N QC RR 3 RUE RON OR DRAN LR ECR C WSCC ECM Tee QUA eee RTT BCR ORURR CRI R TR ACHE RR ONCE NOR UR ONE 1 1 Layout of Main Screen RUN Window UTE EU LIMIT eRe LE ee CTEM ECR eee re ee eee ek ye 14 Layout of Edit Flow Window PEU CREE CTR TC ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 17 Layout of Property Setting Window RACE CCC eee CLC eC EA Ce RE ee RR Re ee eR eR ee Ree 19 Checking System Configuration ERE Va ey dc RR RENE MAR nri da a Rr RA msi ptm cm nc in sn nt om ty RR rs cay ce a a 20 Basic Configuration of FZ3 Series Te CeCe NR ee C E CCE TEE TEE TER Ce TC CER AEE R
128. When reading 2D codes Increasing camera installation efficiency Method objective References Focus Effective when the measurement position changes and the camera becomes out of focus Reference amp Processing Item List Manual Focus p 397 Iris When adjusting Effective when performing lighting adjustment according to the changing brightness at the the lighting measurement site Reference Processing Item List Manual Iris p 400 When adjusting the focus 62 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Editing Processing Units in Scenes In the Edit Flow window editing buttons in the window can be used to change the order of processing units within the scene or to delete processing units u J f Ti r im T n th q Bs aH a i ri i i l Y I 4 n nz men b rad v m Iri Serb 1 a ha Ed d T 05 7 X x D Em E k al k A S F i J i f a Ea Ea nal lus kx sr pEM A de doce H dpa 4 T ou yg mom EO r r E E u us i iden ida Le Wlbk onl oh 9T pO ke uiae B Searching a processing unit A a Convenient when the processing unit you want to select is not displayed on the screen Selecting a processing unit nr n3 Xd In addition to tapping the property setting button icons the editing buttons can be used to automatically select the processing unit
129. Z3 User s Manual Diari r cel C G Heem du Phebe Search 1 A i Ec Crime Search B Capri ie Logs Pog Ar A tee PA Scan Eds Piina J oan Edgs t fy Golo Cita Gy fy St ae abes Lie la 3 E 3 FEES xe me 15 i i a E rl Label Cuna Q Deia g Pima Detect 2 Select the processing item in which to change the region Only image setting processing items included in Input image and Compensate image are displayed nage select l Camera Image Input kd ITIUEEET J Lamera Imaze Input Damera Image Input HORF B Anli Color Shading 3 Select the registration region to change Figures List E l search I Bezion oO 2 Search Region 4 Tap Move and input the value or tap the arrows to move the image Images can also be directly dragged and moved 5 Tap OK The change is registered Monitoring Measurement Value Trends By monitoring the trend in measurement values the occurrence of defects can be prevented in advance and this information can also be helpful in NG error occurrence cause analysis Use the processing item Trend Monitor to monitor the measurement values FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 95 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o Reference Processing Item List Manual Trend Monitor p 374 NG Judgment upper linni a fh Warring Lim
130. a of the sysien Language t 3 Tap OK A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap Yes Change P nguage i fo seleri TTS sape aeli jnis and orales reslark The setting is saved in the controller and the system automatically restarts After the system restarts the language switches to the selected one Note The Language Setting window is displayed also when restarting after executing System initialization Setting the Fan Rotation Speed Fan Control Setting Sets the rotation speed of the controller fan FZ3 39 9 H38 8 FZ3 7 9 H78 9 FZ3 98 P H9P P only Note The factory default setting is low rotation Use fast rotation when using the system in a high temperature environment between 45 and 50 C 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Fan control setting The Fan Control Setting window is displayed 2 Select a fan setting a Low roletion debian Tesperalt ure P7 44 7 Cy High retetion dablent Feasreratursz D 74581 132 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Set value Factory default Description Low rotation Ambient temperature 0 to 45 C High rotation Ambient temperature 0 to 5O C 3 Tap OK ESZS 1 l1 1 speed The fan control setting is disabled in the FZ3 L35 H series For the FZ3 3 U O FZ3 H3 4 series the fan control setting is fixed at low rotation The setting cannot b
131. abled when a folder or file is selected in the List View area p 332 If tapped the Deletion Confirmation window is displayed E Rename Reference Enabled when a folder or file is selected in the List View area p 332 If tapped the Rename window is displayed iA New folder Creates a new folder Toggle list view Reference Switches the display format of the List View area p 332 FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Operations 331 sexipueddy sexipueddy E d List View Area A list of files and folders contained in the folder selected from the folder view area is displayed In addition when an extension name is selected from Kind only the files with the selected extension name are displayed The content displayed is switched if List display toggle EE is tapped e File Name View Area File name Reference Names of files selected in the List View area p 332 are displayed Kind Reference Specifies the types of the file displayed Scene data System data etc in the List View area p 332 Available Operations in Select File Window This section describes the main operations available from the Select File window Note fthe target file is not displayed in the List View area when selecting a file please check that the file type of the target file is selected in Kind Copying Pasting a File or Folder 1 Tap the folder or file that you want to copy in the List View area
132. age mode Freeze Positions C ON iv OFF sub image Imag a U Is the Detail result area active Reference Displaying Flow and Detailed Results p 87 Data cannot be saved The data save may have failed because there was not enough free capacity in the flash memory in the controller The current scene group data in the controller memory is destroyed after the restart Immediately perform one of the recovery avoidance procedures specified below For example reduce the memory usage and then save data again to the controller delete scenes delete processing units adjust the processing unit measurement area or adjust the sizes of registered models Evacuate the current scene group data to a USB memory Tap Data menu Save to file Setting data Scene group data For Measurement Display is not updated Measurement is given priority when the STEP signal input interval is short or continuous measurement is being performed As a result the measurement results overall judgment image individual judgment in the flow display detailed results may not be updated When continuous measurement ends the measurement results for the final measurement are displayed 314 FAQ FZ3 User s Manual About Parallel Interface Tri er signal input signal not accepted Are the cables connected correctly Is the signal cable disconnected You can check the communication status in the Confirmation window Reference
133. ailed results of analysis data are shown s d Sets magnification to display Re messsuremenk rexult Setupi Sel act Wise Pudgs OR imagen aa 43 MG mages l i Sand to UH taan 1 NC msgsk TM fi T Help Clore i Ea Led ZIRAMD iabhaaaplalaageckHi23208 12 12 _10 E0 44 E2E 0 bap FZ3 User s Manual Using NG Analyser oo Buis gt oo Buis gt 110 Measurement data 4 Search 1 Image display area Displays selected images 2 Image selection Selects the image number to be displayed in the image display area Images can be displayed by directly tapping the analysis result window O Camera Image Input 1 Edes Posstion 2 Edge Passion d Position Compensation A search b Control area 1 Target Lerring image v mage file Ep OMRON FI RAMDisk sempleImage Falder informal ton OK images 234 MG ages 5 NG rmeges Standard bhaga Exacute batch messurenent 1 Target Sets images to be measured 2 Standard image Sets the image to be used as a reference for analysis 3 Execute batch measurement All of the specified target images are measured continuously Using NG Analyser FZ3 User s Manual 4 Measurement data Display the desired unit in the list of units and select the unit based on details of unit and details of data Using Method of NG Analyser ESSS 1 0L 1 Classify sample ima
134. area Tit Edu ie Acdipustimert Flow or details of measurement results are displayed Tapping once again returns the screen to the previous status FZ3 User s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 87 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg v uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o kd LET EIS E M Laven npa iw Lire mage layout i image ti x 2 When displaying both the flow and detailed results you can change the size of the Display area of the flow and detailed results by dragging Detail result ET TITEL SIMI Li EEF Bp i Peme j gg Switching the RUN Window to Fast View Mode Select RUN Mode Switches the mode of the RUN window Fast view mode simplifies display items and makes the display speed faster 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Select RUN mode The Select RUN Mode window is displayed 2 Tap and select a mode Select start mcde RUM normal mode 88 Arranging the RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual Set value Factory default Description RUN normal mode RUN fast view mode Selects which mode is used to display the RUN window 3 Tap OK The Select RUN Mode window closes Changing Display Contents on the RUN Window Measurement Information Display Area The display contents on the RUN window measurement information display area can be changed Reference Setting the RUN Window Display RUN Mode
135. ase mode tap A a b Symbol one byte characters input mode C a Alphanumeric Input Mode To switch between uppercase and lowercase mode tap A a The default state is lowercase input mode Operation Method 1 Tap in the item in which a character string is to be set The soft keyboard is displayed 2 Switch the tabs as needed and tap the character that is to be input 3 Tap OK after text has been entered The software keyboard is closed oelecting Files and Folders This section describes data save load methods and operation methods for when selecting a save destination folder for images created during remeasurement etc 330 Basic Knowledge about Operations FZ3 User s Manual The following window will appear in the window to select a file or a folder a Window Title When a file is specified FileExplorer is displayed If a folder is selected Select folder is displayed b Folder View Area A list of folders on the RAM disk and folders in the mounted USB memory is displayed At the root of the tree the drive names of all accessible USB memory devices are displayed ex USBDisk USBDisk2 C Toolbar Reference Enabled when a folder or file is selected in the List View area p 332 When tapped the file that is selected is copied and Paste Ie becomes enabled le Paste Enabled when copying is performed Pastes copied files or folders x Delete Reference En
136. assword setting 142 PLC Link 152 Polar transformation External Reference 288 Polygon 343 Position Compensation External Reference 282 Position Compensation Terminology Explanation 325 Positions 84 Precise Defect External Reference 273 Processing item 49 Processing item Terminology Explanation 327 Processing unit Terminology Explanation 327 RAMDisk 116 Reading 126 Reading data 126 Rectangle 336 Reference position Terminology Explanation 325 Remeasuring saved images 90 RESET 197 Restart 27 FZ3 User s Manual Result Display External Reference 300 HS 232C RS 422 135 149 RUN window 74 RUN window display selection 138 RUN window selection 88 Save last logging image 97 Save to file 118 Saving during scene group switch 130 Scan Edge Position External Reference 260 Scan Edge Width External Reference 261 SCENE 197 Scene 42 Scene Terminology Explanation 326 Scene data saving 120 Scene group 46 Scene group Terminology Explanation 327 Scene group data saving 120 Scene group switch 65 Scene switch 65 Scene switch time 130 SCNGROUP 198 SCNLOAD 200 SCNSAVE 201 Screen capture 105 SCRSWITCH 202 Search External Reference 248 Search processing 327 Search speed 327 Select images 90 Sensitive Search External Reference 250 Serial interface 186 Set Unit Data External Reference 291 Set Unit Figure External Reference 291 Setup changes 42 SGRLOAD 202 SGRSAVE 203 Shape 317 Shape Search External Ref
137. asurement 295 Se qe soudJajoy JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 X3 o Branch Conditional Branch Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Expr ssion Avesuit Gai Maximum 256 characters result of calculation selected in expression A i Maximum 256 characters result of calculation selected in 6 Expression B result Get expression B i 0 NO T Comparison result 1 YES 8 Destination unit No 0 to 32767 0 A B 1 A B 120 Condition type Set Get 2 A B 3 A gt B 4 A gt B YES branch 1 End processing ua destination unit No Get 0 to 32767 Unit No NO Destination unit 1 End processing iid No dica 0 to 32767 Unit No DI Branch No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG DI input No Get No used to indicate DI input 00000 to 11111 Unit No Get Unit number at destination corresponding to DI input Destination Unit 120 to No 0 1 End processing 151 Destination Unit eU Se 0 to 9999 Unit No No 31 296 Branch FZ3 User s Manual Output result Data Output 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 510 ASCII 99999999 9999 to 12 Get only 999999999 9999 Binary 2147483 648 to 2147483 647 m 0 Ethernet 136 Communication method Set Get 1 RS 232C RS 422 141 Field separator Set Get
138. at the top or bottom or above or below an arbitrarily selected processing unit in the unit list LCD off gt camas A Specifying the position for a processing unit and adding it 5 p s Adds and inserts a processing unit at the bottom position of the scene or another specified position Moving a processing unit L3 een A marten Moves a processing unit within a scene and changes the processing order Copying and pasting a processing unit e pase Copies and pastes a processing unit while maintaining settings data Deleting a processing unit B me Deletes processing units within a scene Changing the name of a processing unit 7 F Changes processing unit names within a scene Unit names must begin with a character other than semi voiced sound symbol and voiced sound symbol Also unit names cannot FZ3 User s Manual Editing Processing Units in Scenes 63 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E consist of only a single byte number only a or only a Setting details of a processing unit 5 Sets the properties of any processing unit within a scene Shiftarea m s Changes related figure data in one batch New Folder i sie Used when multiple processing units are managed as one group Operating processing units as a group i Used when processing units are copied or deleted together A checkbox is displayed in
139. ata The data to be deleted is shown as follows Names set for a scene group All scene data within a scene group 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 Tap Edit The Scene Group Maintenance window is displayed 3 Select the scene group to delete and tap Clear e proun ErDup group 3 Qrpiup 4 group Er oie croup rroup 54 Erour 3 hyo group group 12 groupe 1 grbu graun group A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap Yes Scene group data is deleted 5 Tap Close Renaming a Scene Group Scene groups can be arbitrarily named This is convenient for managing more than one scene group 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Editing Scene Groups 71 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Buas E 12 2 Set Scene group name 1 Tap for the Scene group name The soft keyboard is displayed 2 Enter a new name Use 15 characters or less to Input words 3 Tap Close Editing Scene Groups FZ3 User s Manual Performing Test Measurement Starting Operation FZ3 User s Manual This chapter describes tests methods for checking whether correct measurement can be performed at the set conditions and describes useful functions for operation i Reference ADJUST Window and RUN Window p
140. ata Output EtherNet IP Either fixed point output or floating point output can be selected for data output Reference Fieldbus Data Output p 429 Timing Chart EtherNet IP I O timing for each command is explained here The signal timing through EtherNet IP is equivalent to parallel IO and command execution and data output are performed independently This section explains the timing of command execution and data output through the EXE signal FZ3 User s Manual Control Output through EtherNet IP 219 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N When executing a command with the EXE signal EXE ON pos 1 Turn the EXE signal ON after setting the OFF m er command code and the parameter 2 The BUSY signal turns UN The FLG signal turns ON after the command code response code and response data have been stored cC c 1 4 Turn the EXE signal OFF when the FLE signal turns UN 5 The FLG signal turns OFF when the EXE signal turns OFF portent 1L 9 Control the EXE signal using the FLG signal Screen operation is not allowed when the EXE signal is turned ON Make sure to turn the EXE signal OFF after executing a command For data output with handshaking ON DSA 1 Output data and turn the GATE signal ON OFF when the DSA signal turns ON see 2 Turn the DSA signal OFF when the GATE ON signal turns ON GATE OFF Eei 3 Turn the GATE signa
141. ate the measurement interval and display update interval by watching actual operation 78 Performing Test Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Key Points for Adjustment This section describes key points for adjustment when aiming to improve measurement precision and shorten measurement time Stabilizing Measurement This section describes key points for adjustment when measurement is not stable There are two methods for improving measurement precision Performing processing of images loaded from the camera filtering or adjusting settings and parameters Adjusting Parameters of Each Processing Item Adjustment to improve precision and stability varies depending on the processing item For details see Key Points for Adjustment for each processing item in the Processing Item List Manual Processing Images Filtering There are cases in which high precision measurement is impossible such as when using images loaded from the camera that have noise irregularities or low contrast or when the background has patterns during defect measurement In this case measurement accuracy can be improved by performing processing of measurement images in advance Reference Processing ltem List Manual Filtering p 302 When measurement images have irregularities search and location positioning are not stable The filtering items Smoothing strong and weak and Median are both effective Smoothing strong and weak This processing chan
142. ation Number of image input Camera used related processing item restriction 0 3 megapixel color camera 81 0 3 megapixel monochrome camera 245 Intelligent compact camera FZ SQ 68 2 megapixel color camera Note 1 13 2 megapixel monochrome camera Note 1 39 5 megapixel color camera Note 1 6 5 megapixel monochrome camera Note 1 19 Note 1 2 megapixel cameras can be used with FZ3 3 9 9 H39 H software version 3 30 or later FZ3 L35H FZ3 79 O H79 9 and FZ3 99 H H9 P E series 5 megapixel cameras can be used with FZ3 7 H O H7 9 8 and FZ3 99 O H9 9 H series Image input related processing items Target processing items are as follows Item Processing item Camera Image Input Loading images Camera Image Input HDR Camera Switching Position Compensation Trapezoidal Correction Filtering Background Suppression Performing Color Gray Filter image compensation Anti Color Shading Extract Color Filter Stripes Removal Filter Halation Cut Panorama Note 1 Polar Transformation Note 2 Display Image File Note 3 Display results Display Last NG image Note 4 Note 1 When using a panorama each image input related unit after panorama may consume up to a maximum of 5 items Note 2 When using a Polar Transformation each image input related unit after Polar Transformation may consume up to a maximum of 2 items Note 3 Image file display consumes the number of imag
143. ators are not output in the absence of the following data The range of values that can be output is as follows 999999999 9999 lt Measurement value lt 999999999 9999 When measurement value is lt 999999999 9999 999999999 9999 is output When measurement value is gt 999999999 9999 999999999 9999 is output When JG Judgement is set the next value is output OK 1 NG 1 Note Even if measurement is complete data output will not stop until all of the data is output Please note data output will not be interrupted When outputting Binary Data Set the output format as Binary in Setting of the Data Output processing item 212 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Output format Weasured value amp 1000 of Date lle sured value 21000 of Data 7 Massured value x 100 af Dats 4 bytes 4 cytes 4 bytes The measurement data is multiplied by 1000 and output is continuous with 4 bytes per each data item Negative numbers are output in 2 s complement format For a definition of 2 s complement see Reference Terminology Explanations p 325 Example When Data 0 is 256 324 and data 1 is 1 000 00 03 ES 44 FF FF FC 18 Po ooo Data 0 256324 Data 1 1000 256 324 x 1000 1 000 x 1000 Note Unlike ASCII output binary output has no separators between data such as field separators or record separators etc Reference
144. ays the scene group number and the scene number of the currently displayed scene b Image Display Area Displays the measured image 1 Property setting buttons Displays the name of the currently selected processing item FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 15 uoneJedo eJojeg C Control Area Displays Flow Detail result Image display and Tool box Flow Displays the judgement results for the flow and each unit Asadi BE unii D camsr lage lipul Ej dye Posilian j mm reh uoneJedo eJojeg 1 Moves to the top processing unit with an NG error 2 Moves to the next processing unit with an NG error Note The size of the processing unit buttons can be changed through View menu Display the enlarged flow in the ADJUST Window Detail result The detailed measurement results of the processing units selected in the measurement flow are displayed as text Lage OD Image display Sets the display method for the Image Display area Tool box Starts and stops simplified non stop adjustment and switches to the ADJUST window Items for which operation is performed in the ADJUST window can be allocated to buttons and they can then be executed in the RUN window Swilr bn AMST maa Ente inglesi rupe sb gi aij 16 Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual d Measurement Manager Bar tures LCD Of gt 2 1 Capture Saves the cont
145. b Processing ltem List Manual Data Output p 418 The range of values that can be output is as follows 2147483 648 Measurement value 2147483 647 When measurement value is 2147483 648 2147483 648 is output When measurement value is gt 2147483 647 2147483 647 is output When JG Judgement is set the next value is output OK 1000 1 x 1000 NG 1000 1 x 1000 Note Even if measurement is complete data output will not stop until all of the data is output Please note data output will not be interrupted FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 213 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Control Output through EtherNet IP This section explains how to set the required communication specifications when using EtherNet IP to communicate with external devices EtherNet IP is a multi vendor network for the industrial community using Ethernet that is managed by ODVA Open DeviceNet Vender Association A cyclic communication tag data link communication with an EtherNet IP device that supports the class 1 communication of the EtherNet IP standard can be achieved without a user program Using the tag data link communication FZ3 sends and receives data that is the same as the parallel interface to and from an external device EtherNet IP communication specif
146. c db Flexible Search 0 No judgement unmeasured Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 to 4 DOSE pero 1 No models found 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 14 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get M eio 1 Before scroll 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 249 co O CI co So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo Xx3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Search mode Set Get 0 Correlation 1 Shape 0 OFF 121 With rotation Set Get t ON 122 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 123 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 124 Skipping angle Set Get 1 to 30 0 OFF 126 Stab CR Set Get 1 to 15 128 Stab PT Set Get 1 to 5 0 OFF 134 Sub pixel Set Get 1 ON 136 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Sensitive Search 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG posen tay For color cameras 0 000 to 219 9705 2 Deviation Get only For monochrome cameras 0 000 to 127 000 3 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 4 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 6 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 99999 9999 to 99999 99
147. can be added in order to restrict use Reference amp Setting the RUN Window Password Password Setting p 142 oetting the Encoder Trigger Encoder Trigger Setting 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Encoder trigger setting 2 Setthe target encoder use Encoder trigger Resolubtlon pulze ratation g 0 0000 pul se degreel Waid ral Imi Y 1 i E Set value ae Setting item Facon deadh Description Use Encoder Checked Sets whether the encoder trigger will be used trigger Unchecked The maximum input frequency of the encoder trigger is 20 kHz Sets how many pulses equal one rotation Please set ML according to the resolution of the encoder Count rotations with pulse Z When on judges whether it made a full rotation with pulse Z When off judges whether it made a full rotation based on whether phase A pulse input reaches phase A resolution Checked Unchecked FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 139 ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu 5 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o 3 Setthe trigger detailed settings as required rigger setting Trigger signal i Enable Liming z Fulze reset kising Pulse A tJ 3 d FH ET US Support bachlashine usime phase B E i cid n Set value D D P Setting item Ta EEA escription Phase A Trigger signal s Biases Sets the phase to be used as the trigger si
148. ces to acquire measurement results 1 0 to Output time 1000 0 ms 5 0 ms Valid only when Output control is set to Handshaking A timeout error occurs when no response from external devices is received within the time that has been set 0 5 to 120 0 Timeout S 10 0 s Valid only when Output control is set to Synchronization output Number of delay Wr s Set the number of times that the STEP signal turning on will be ignored before measurement results of the STEP signal are output ON Select whether to maintain OR signal output for an sh R ne anor SSMUS OFF arbitrary amount of time 0 1 to Set the OR signal output time Output time 1000 0 ms Valid only when One shot OR signal is set to ON Set 5 0 ms a value that is shorter than the measurement time Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Parallel window closes Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface Check the communication status with the external devices that are connected with a parallel interface You can check whether wiring and communication settings have been performed correctly 1 On the Main The Parallel screen tap System menu Communication Parallel window is displayed 2 Tap Confirmation to check the I O status Set ting Pingu slate C a Display STEPO STEP1 DSAO DSA1 DI RUN GATEO GATE1 BUSY
149. coordinate Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 14 Count 0 to 32 101 Output Coordinates O ARET SCION 1 Before scroll 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get t ON 0 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement 1 OFF 120 TRA 0 Correlation 1 Shape 0 OFF 121 With rotation Set Get 1 ON 122 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 123 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 124 Skipping angle Set Get 1 to 30 0 OFF 0 OFF 134 Sub pixel Set Get 1 ON 136 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 248 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 139 Lower limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 141 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 142 Upper limit of the corr Set Get 0 to 100 143 Lower limit of the corr Set Get 0 to 100 144 Save registered model Set Get E 145 Candidate Point Level Set Get O to 100 0 Corr ascending 1 Corr descending 2 X ascending 3 X descending 4 Y ascending 5 Y descending 148 Upper limit of count judgement Set Get 0 to 32 149 Lower limit of count judgement Set Get 0 to 32 146 Sort condition Set Get 0 OFF 150 Multiple output 1 ON 1000 NN x4 NN 0 to 31 Correlation value 0 to 100 1001 NN x4 NN 0 to 31 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1002 NN x 4 NN 0 to 31 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1003 NN x 4 NN 0 1031 ni
150. cting Tool NG analyser from the controller menu This tool which analyzes setting flows is used mainly in 2 ways Adjustment of measurement setting values during start up Use sample work images to analyze optimal setting values for the processing flow Analysis of NG causes during operation Use logged images to analyze NG causes The operation flow is as follows Prepare sample work images or Preparation wesineimazes joo Buis gt Re measure in batch Identify processing items Correct the setting value Correction 108 Using NG Analyser FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of NG Analyser Screens Targat M Lode irae bese E Tee Tile Dasa he gas Tii Panen zb Poor inn APasilian operon Folder Phfiriesl inh DR i espe HI eter MI i eager Exmcuim balo gered deaqurement ela fi San rch Dg res lat lon Pzrilian X f tar IH Takip EA jesta Bessured walus 4 Pea ier Li recom ell pri Hida JLGEF i a mwearrad daja Tael lage E NUMEIM FZNHHMS Skee le EE rares QE image AG imagen AC image med ia Of falda rare pron a Analysis result display area 1 2 3 D amp kailz of unikl Delaris of dale 1 List of units A list of units currently set is shown together with analysis results 2 Details of unit Detailed analysis results of each unit are shown 3 Details of data Det
151. ctionary correlation usage fla Set Get uode y g g 1 Used 136 Lower limit of the corr Set Get 0 to 100 137 Upper limit of chara Num Set Get 1 to 32 138 Lower limit of chara Num Set Get 1 to 32 139 Verification string Set Get Verification string 140 to 283 Model usage flag Set Get Pbi 1000 to 1031 1032 to 1063 1064 to 1095 1096 to 1127 1128 to 1159 1160 to 1191 1192 to 1223 1224 to 1255 1256 to 1287 1288 to 1319 1320 to 1351 1352 to 1383 Unit No Detected index Detected model No Chara code Detected NG Cause Correlation value Detected coordinate X Detected coordinate Y Detected angle Reference X Reference Y Reference angle FZ3 User s Manual 1 Used Get only 1 None 0 to 9999 Get only 0 to 35 Get only 0 to 4 Get only 0 to OXFFFF UTF 16 encoded Get only 0 to 7 0 to 100 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 180 to 180 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 180 to 180 Get only Get only Get only Get only Get only Get only Get only Measurement 275 Se qe soudJejoy JeuJ9 x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o Date Verification Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 1 Verification string Get only Character string with 32 characters or less 2 Read string Get only Character string with 32 characters or less 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get TON i09 1 OFF 1 OFF 120 OCR un
152. cts References Defect Precise Defect FZ3 Hxxx series Effective when checking for folding on plain works Reference Processing Item List Manual Defect p 215 Checking the interior exterior and direction Method objective Interior exterior and orientation inspection through presence of markings When precision is required for measurement of markings 60 Processing Item Selection Guidelines References Flexible Search Effective when there is variation in the size and position of the markings to be checked Reference Processing Item List Manual Flexible Search p 59 Measuring chip components Fine Matching Effective when there are patterns on the background of markings markings have a complex shape or precision is required for measurement of markings Reference Processing ltem List Manual Fine Matching p 231 Measuring LOG FZ3 User s Manual Checking for mixing of different objects Method objective Inspection for mixing of different measurement objects with variations Inspection for mixing of different objects for objects with plain background References Flexible Search Effective for inspection of mixing of different objects in which there are variations with markings and the shape of measurement objects Reference Processing ltem List Manual Flexible Search p 59 Disparity judge Search Effective for inspection of mixing of diff
153. ctually starting operation Only information necessary during operation is displayed uoneJedo eJojeg ADJUST window is displayed after the Language Selling window To set the measurement conditions move to the Edit Flow window If there is no problem with the measurement conditions move to the RUN window Edit flow window Property window T Window for assembling the measurement flow Flow parts processing items are displayed on the right side and the measurement flaw scene is displayed on the left side When the measurement trigger is activated processing is execuled in sequence starting from the top of the flow Window for setting conditions for processing units processing items registered in the scene set in the flow This window can also be displayed directly from the Main screen ADJUST window Layout of Main Screen ADJUST Window This screen is used to check whether measurement is being performed correctly according to the set conditions FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 11 uoneJedo eJojeg Soon Vew Measure Data System Help ADJUST ms a Menu Bar Select operations and settings menus related to measurement b Measurement Information Display Area 1 2 3 1 e 3 O0 Srene group IET aci Signal outpul OFF Freeze Overall judgement Displays a scene s overall judgement result OK N
154. data Data for each scene Sequence of units set in each scene and setting values of units scn within scenes Beene genRaee The data of scene group with 32 scenes sgp System Scene group 0 data Data combining the system data and the data from Scene Group O bkd portent D LL During saving do not restart turn off power or remove the USB memory Data will be corrupted and the system will not work properly at the next start up It is especially necessary to pay attention when Save to file is being performed for system scene group 0 data as the data being saved will also be saved to the controller flash memory at the same time When Save to file is executed the data to save is also saved in the controller except Scene Group Data 1 to 31 120 T 2 On the Main screen tap Data Save to file The Save to File window is displayed Tap Setting data and select the data to save When saving to USB memory plug a USB memory device into the controller Logging image o c Copv filas ele to be saved Scene data Scene group data O s sism data Syelen E Eocane croup dete When scene data is selected tap to select the scene number that is to be the save target cane data Specify the save destination folder and file name Wasi inet lon Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device FZ3 User s Manual
155. difference are detected as edges Edge Position Measurement region 10096 dim 4 Max color diffare xe 4 Edge level Min calor difference 320 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual Edge Pitch Example jtm om om A ORE E GEO EO E omm x x xX X denn nement area Edge level mmm B Edge level F a omommomom TEETE mom omn ee ee mom m When performing measurement using color difference value Edge level is set using color difference absolute value Measurement region 4 Noise Edge level absolute valus Noise Level This level judges whether an edge is present or not The maximum value and minimum value for color difference in the edge detection area are determined and if the difference is less than the noise level it is judged that there is no edge When detection is affected by noise increase this value within area Maximum value minimum value of color difference noise level edge does not exist measurement result is fail Maximum value minimum value of color difference gt Noise level edge exists targeted for measurement Example When noise level is set to 30 Measurement i region MEN Max color difference 60 60 15230 Judged as with Min color difference 15 edge and measure Measurement region Pocos J TN Max color difference 35 35 15 30 Min color difference 15 Judged as with edge and
156. diting Processing Units in Scenes p 63 Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 65 Editing Scenes p 67 Editing Scene Groups p 70 41 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E What Is a Scene Processing items for use with various measurement objects and measurement objectives are provided in this product By combining and executing these processing items measurement adapted to the purpose can be implemented A combination of processing items is called a scene and scenes can be easily created by combining processing items that are suited to the measurement purpose from the list of processing items provided Scene Edit Unit Edit Model registration Region setting Judgement condition Available unit operations Edit Unit B M E E M 08 M E o M ao 0 H RR Procitem List Calculation Available scene operations Edit Scene Conditional Branch Addidelete unit Shift Unit Camera Image Input Rename an Unit E ENDE Delete scene eT qq Rename Scene k Scene switch Changing the set up using the scene function Multiple scenes can be created For example by creating scenes for each measurement object such as using Scene 0 to inspect an ABC label and Scene 1 to inspect an XYZ label changing the set up can be performed smoothly just by changing the scene even when the measurement object and measurement objective have changed Ref
157. dth STEP Setting This setting is performed as a countermeasure against STEP input chattering and to prevent operation malfunctions due to entrance of noise When Filter Setting Value Is 100 us Initial Value The STEP signal is detected as being on at the point it is on continuously for at least 100 us and measurement begins at this point Accordingly STEP signal detection is delayed by an amount of time equivalent to the set filter value Also when turning from ON to OFF the OFF filter fixed at 500 us is activated and the STEP signal is detected as OFF when it is off for at least 500 us 1 When there is no chattering ON is detected when the ON status continues for at least 100 ms 100y s 2 When there is chattering OFF SLEP OFF is detected when the OFF status continues for 500 ms OFF SIEP ON OFF is detected when the OFF status continues for 500 ms 100y s 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller STEP setting 2 Setthe filter width in the STEP setting area STEP signal ilter width Lae 109 Help UK Lance FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 141 JUBSWUOJIAUQ uJajs S y BulbuUeUD 5 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o Set value Factory default Setting item Description STEP signal filter width us Sets the filter width oetting the RUN Window Password Password Setting Operation on the RUN window can
158. e MM as the save destination files are stored in this folder Poe This file is used for management Do not delete this file Panel Ink 2 To view the inside of the RAMDisk enter RAMDisk at the end of the IP address When the RAMDisk is set as the image logging destination the logging files are displayed IUE TENUIS Micreseit imemet taplores He EF vee PIES TB Hap LI gt saath mers ISl Addar d my 11 5 5 LOW S ADS haus al Deer D 06 1 622 000 fz Diler Pasce amp il Stee dd ie 22 150 Fa m prm ab un 5 0n E gear lek pisos mre k Esf zUUB CM E E ez mj He Coun a ATR PF iu Seret Doren Eg 2008 07 CeO 22 TET He kan Hi Febr k vcn Id 2056 26 C tie PB Stet dz eee dm 3 In the same way as with normal file operations logging images can be output from the controller FZ3 User s Manual Externally Outputting Data through FTP 243 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SDOUJS N Se qe eoua8J9Jos JeuJo x3 o 244 Input image im Reference Measurement im Reference Reference i Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference i Reference Reference Reference im Reference Reference Reference im Reference Reference External Reference Tables Measurement Image Switching p 247 Search p 248 Flexible Search p 249 Sensitive Search p 250 ECM Search p 252 EC Circle Search p 253
159. e changed to fast rotation Fast rotation can be selected on the screen but the setting will not change oetting the Start up Status Startup Setting The status for when power is turned on is set here Select a fan rotation Inspection can be set to start immediately after the power is turned on by setting the scene number of the scene in which measurement contents are set In addition settings can be done so that the Camera Setting window is not displayed during start up 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Startup setting The Startup Setting window is displayed 2 Change the settings ts EE TIN re time Qeerelion mode Seecif y tlarlup scene scan group Scene EFrOUP Scene select startuo mode v ADJUST C RUN MesasureBeni min amp ger bar siatie i Open r Close Operation priority i Heasuresent result priority l Bend operation priaritiy Measurement initialization priority f Heazurement trigger receipt priority t Procezsing of re drawinr on screen priority E Gamen FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 133 JUBSWUOJIAUQ uJajs S y BulbuUeUD 5 Ju9uJUOJIAU uJajs S y BuiDueu o Setting value Item Factory Description default Scene The selected scene scene group will be the scene Checked scene group during start up Specify startup The scene scene group set in the controller when
160. e 1 uses GATE1 OR1 READY1 STEP1 and DSAf1 If the operation mode FZ3 9 O LJ H9 O O only is Multi line random trigger mode the RUN signal cannot be checked If the operation mode FZ3 9 OO H9 LILI only is Multi line random trigger mode the ERR signal is used in common 3 Change the contents to be sent utput state RUN OFF ERR OFF BUSY ORO OFF GATED READTO GATE OFF READY I MA OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Por OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A B 3 1 11 12 13 4 I5 When switching between ON OFF is performed the changed contents are displayed on the monitors of external devices Please verify it 4 Tap OK The Parallel window closes I O Format Parallel Interface Input Format When the Main screen is displayed the following commands can be input STEP signal Measurement is performed once when STEP signal turns on DSA signal When Output Control is set to Handshaking this is a signal to provide notification that the external device is ready to receive data Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 221 DI signal Commands can be input in the following format Set 0 OFF or 1 ON for each DI signal Confirm commands and information and turn DI7 execute ON with an interval of at least 1 ms 224 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual When 1 line is used Input format DI to DIO DI Dle DIS Di4 DIS DI2
161. e O and line 1 When it is non procedure TCP data output cannot be performed using serial data output 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial Ethernet The Ethernet window is displayed 2 Setthe following items ddress setting Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address wp sp sed m Subnel ask 258 E ial O askal o Default gateway mn i a o onm ONS server NEL eT MENT NES Input Output setting Input mode Norma Input form i ASCII Output IP address z a n v m o sl Input Output port No TIA OK Cancel 180 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Non procedure TCP Ethernet Address seiting C Obtain an IP address automat ically Use the fallaving IP IP address Subnet mask Default raleway ONS server Ineut utput setting Input mode Inpul form Input Dutput port Mo FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure address wp wp mp 99i a mJ REST is wp ep Tid wl Pr 181 seoi eq jeuie x3 uyim Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Duioeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Setting item Address setting Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 25
162. e code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Stores the acquired scene No Acquiring Scene Group Number Acquires the curre nt scene group No Command PLC to controller Command area top channel Command code 15 12 B it Description 2 2000 3 0020 FZ3 User s Manual 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 Set command codes Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 167 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO SPON seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0010 0000 0000 0000 Commandeod 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired scene group No Scene Switching Switches the scene number to be used Command PLC to controller Command area Command top channel code 15 12 11 8 7 4 0001 0000 0000 0000 2 1000 4 5 Response Controller to PLC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Bit 3 0 Description 0000 Set command codes Specifies the scene No Response Bit area Description top cha
163. e end of the flow d Edit Flow Buttons Search up Search down FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 17 uoneJedo eJojeg Searching can be performed to find out what position a processing item occupies in the unit list The icon for the processing item to be searched for is selected in the processing item tree and clicked This function is convenient when setting long flows Select top Select bottom Selects the processing unit at the top or bottom of the flow Select above Select below Selects the processing unit located one above or one below the currently selected processing unit Rename Displays a window for renaming the selected processing unit Move up Move down Moves the selected processing unit upward or downward Copy Copies the selected processing unit Paste Pastes the copied processing unit immediately before the selected processing unit Pasting cannot be performed if any operations other than paste are performed after copying Delete Deletes the selected processing unit Append Bottom Adds a processing unit to the bottom of the flow Insert Inserts a new processing unit immediately before the selected processing unit New folder Used when multiple processing units are managed as one group Shift area Changes related figure data in one batch Multiple selection Used when processing units are copied or deleted together Set Displays the processing item setting window for th
164. e folder to copy move Tap and select the file format If All files is selected you can copy or move all files in the folder When any of the file formats is selected you can specify the type of files extension in the folder to copy or move Select file Copies or moves the selected file name Tap and specify a file name 4 If you wish to delete the source file after saving a copy to USB memory check Delete original data after save Select folder Select file Balesi file gt b select folder FRED Ian mM far files 124 Copying Moving Files FZ3 User s Manual 5 Tap OK amp siinaklan Fnldar name j a Help Of ance The window showing transfer status is displayed and the data is sent to the save destination FZ3 User s Manual Copying Moving Files 125 ejye Bulpeo7 bulaes eye Buipeo1 Bui eg o Loads the settings data saved in an external device to the controller The scene name and scene group name that have been loaded are displayed in the measurement information display area Note If Load from file is performed for system scene group 0 data the data being loaded will also be saved to the controller flash memory at the same time During loading do not restart turn off power or remove the USB memory Data will be corrupted and the system will not work properly at the next startup 1 Perform either of the following
165. e following systems Be sure to attach an IFZ destination extension to the file name RAMDisk USBDisk ESSTS If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response 194 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Example When the image data of image data No 3 is saved with the file name LABEL 1 IFZ in the IMGO1 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned Command LL IMIGISJAIVIE 3 X USBDisk2 Y IMGO1Y LABEL 1 IFZ fr Response OJK MEASURE or M Executing measurement Executes measurement one time lt Command format gt lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Normal Normal Fxxx series Measureame About Normal Fxxx series method Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 lt Parameters explanation gt Measurement result When Data Output is set in the flow the measurement results are output When Data Output is not set the measurement results are not output Reference amp Output Format Non procedure p 211 Starts continuous measurement Starts continuous measurement FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 195 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoe
166. e selected processing unit e Display Options Show guide When checked explanations for processing items are displayed Enlarge flow When checked the a Unit list flow is displayed with large icons Enlarge item tree When checked the f Processing item tree is displayed with large icons Ref other Scene s flow When checked other scene flows within the same scene group can be referred to f Processing Item Tree This area is for selecting processing items to add to the flow Processing items are classified by type and displayed as a tree Tapping the plus sign of any item displays expanded contents 18 Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual below that item Tapping the minus sign of any item collapses the expanded contents When Ref other Scene s flow is checked the scene select box and other scene flows are displayed g Guide Shows an explanation for the processing item selected in the processing item tree These are used as reference when selecting processing items To display guides check Show guide in e Display options Layout of Property Setting Window This window is used for detailed setting of measurement parameters and judgement conditions for processing items uoneJedo eJojeg a Item Tab Area Displays the settings items for the processing unit currently being set Perform settings starting with the item on the left b Detail Area Set detailed items
167. e setting value items per unit FZ3 User s Manual About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used 347 sexipueddy o sexipueddy E Note 4 Display Last NG Image consumes the number of save setting value items per unit portent L 1 If there is one or more Sensitive Search in the flow the number of image input items that can be used is only reduced by one In the case of FZ3 9 8 O H9G O the number of processing items is not limited and as many processing items as permitted by the memory can be registered Note however that a warning message is displayed when the available memory drops to below 1 GB In this case adjust the inspection flow to ensure at least 1 G of available memory 348 About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used FZ3 User s Manual The function that enables continuous high speed image input is called the multiple image input function The maximum number of images that can be loaded based on each specification is shown below FZ3 L35 0 16 Camera0 Camera1 4 Camera0 Camera1 f 32 Camera2 Camera3 8 Camera2 Camera3 FZ3 3H O FZ3 H3 0 0 4 Note 1 FZ3 7 O O FZ3 H7 2 D 2s 8 2 FZ3 9 0 U Note 1 2 megapixel cameras can be used with software version 3 30 or later ESZS 0 lLAo l The multiple input function cannot be used when the built in lighting of an intelligent compact camera
168. e the following four image display patterns Item Description Displays 1 image Since images are enlarged this is ideal for checking details 1 image 2 images are displayed side by side Suitable for when 2 cameras are connected and images are to be checked all at one time 2 images 82 Arranging the RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual 4 images are viewed together with one each at the left right upper and lower positions 4 images Suitable for when 4 cameras are connected and images are to be checked all at one time Displays four small images at the bottom and also one larger selected image This view is preferable when you wish to check details of a certain image when four cameras are connected Thumbnail display is not available in the RUN window Fast view mode When using the thumbnail display in the ADJUST window the display will change to 4 images if you switch to the RUN window Fast view mode Thumbnail For the selected image the color of button turns lighter r E 2 Select which processing unit image to display for each image After tapping the display assignment to change tap the relevant processing unit in the measurement flow Changing Display Contents The display contents of the Image Display area can be changed in order to make the measurement status easier to understand 1 Tap the image to be changed Image No 0 Image No 2 C EE I Uu Image No 3 FZ3 Use
169. eR eeeeReHeecc e4eeeeSeeeMeeeeeeeeeWc 4 23 eeeeeeeeee eeeeeHeHSeHeeHHHe 353 Manual Revision History T 0n L0 Qw 356 Index HH 357 FZ3 User s Manual How This Manual Is Organized This manual includes two manuals the User s Manual which describes basic operations and settings for vision sensors and the Processing Item List Manual which describes the setting options for each processing item Conventions Used in This Manual oymbols The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings important Indicates relevant operational precautions that must be followed Note Indicates operation related suggestions from OMRON Use of Quotation Marks and Brackets In this manual menus and other items are indicated as follows Menu Indicates the menu names or processing items shown in the menu bar n Item name Indicates the item names displayed on the screen Version Upgrade Information The newly added functions are described here Revision history eS Description of newly added functions Reference in manual function EtherNet IP EtherNet IP communication is now supported Reference User s Manual Control Output Supported software version 3 30 or later via EtherNet IP p 214 Network Saving to a network drive is now supported Reference User s Manual Setting a drive Su
170. easurement Input signal Scene group switching Signal DIO to 4 DI5 DI6 DI7 Function Set scene group No 0 to 31 ON ON This is the execution trigger After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 on after an interval over 1 ms BUSY signal is on during implementation of commands After checking that the BUSY signal has turned on turn DI7 off and then turn DIO to 6 off If the DI7 signal OFF timing cannot be set faster than the BUSY signal OFF timing on the control side set the scene switching additional time to lengthen the BUSY signal OFF timing FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 235 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Clears measurement value by the parallel command Starting the measurement Exiting the measurement OFF RUN ON abet DIO 6 j OFF DI7 ON al OFF 1 READY ON iI 1 OFF BUSY ON Command execution Output signal Signal Function RUN Turns ON when the controller is set to the RUN window Turns OFF in the ADJUST window READY Turns OFF when the command to clear the measurement value is being executed Turns OFF as long as the BUSY signal is turned ON Turns ON when the measurement value is being cleared The amount of time during which the BUSY l l l BUSY signal is turned ON is approximately 1 ms Input signal Signal Function DIO to 4 Turns the command OFF DI5 Turns the command OFF DIG Turns the command ON T
171. ection flag for feature N 0to7 quantity Set Get TIA ENO eae imito uagement Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N 0to7 condition for feature quantity FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 271 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo x3 o TOSE ee Owe MINS Jqudetnen Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N 20to7 condition for feature quantity 4000 N Judgement condition feature N S01509y anye Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1100 N Judgement condition feature N 0 to gg Qentity 1 Get only _ 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 4200 N Judgement condition feature N 0 to 99 Want 2 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 4300 N Judgement condition feature N 0 to 99 Wantity 5 Get only _ 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 4400 N Judgement condition feature iN s otago anys Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1500 N Judgement condition feature N 0 to gg Wantity 9 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1600 N Judgement condition feature iN A HOMES Getonly 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1700 N Judgement condition feature iNiSiO 1099 ro Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 Defect 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement re
172. ectives such as counting quantities checking for deformation and checking for contamination Reference Measuring positions p 57 Reference Detecting defects and foreign materials p 58 Reference Count p 59 Reference Measuring dimensions p 59 56 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Reference Measuring folding of papers and sheets p 60 Reference Checking the interior exterior and direction p 60 Reference Checking for mixing of different objects p 61 Reference Checking for deformation p 61 Reference Inspecting characters p 62 Reference Reading barcodes p 62 Reference Reading 2D codes p 62 Reference Increasing camera installation efficiency p 62 Measuring positions Method objective Positioning of the measurement objects with low contrast Label position detection Robot arm positioning Position measurement for measurement objects with variations Measurement of the inclination of a circular measurement object FZ3 User s Manual References ECM Search Shape Search FZ3 Hxxx series Effective for positioning measurement objects such as LCD substrates glass substrates and sheets which have low contrast and in which color differences at measurement locations are not obvious Reference Processing ltem List Manual ECM Search p 79 Reference amp Processing Item List Manual Shape Search p 100 Edge Position
173. ed as the model Available memory is insufficient Available application memory is low It may cause Memory may become insufficient during operation or an error may occur when the insufficient memory operation mode is switched depending on the Review the inspection flow and reduce the memory consumption setting The free capacity of RAMDisk is insufficient If nothing is done Clean up the content of RAMDisk to increase free space If this error occurs even though measurement cannot enough free space is available scene group data may be too large Review the inspection be performed flow correctly Increase free capacity in RAMDisk There are restrictions as to what can be set up based on the camera and processing items being used Please adjust the region size so that the region is not too large Processing item Region type Region UNE of Region size exceeds Please narrow region Eua 9003712 Image logging failed due to insufficient memory at the save destination The error Logging error message disappears after 10 s Please delete unneeded files in the save destination or prepare a new USBDisk FZ3 User s Manual Error Messages and Troubleshooting 311 sexipueddy o The connection was cut off based on the idling session time set on the network logging The Logon to Network destination PC Server screen is At the command prompt on the PC enter displayed net config server autodisconnect 1 and disable the automatic disc
174. egister 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Data Address 200 output area Set whether or not to provide an interlock with the PLC when performing data output None Data is output regardless of the status of signals from the PLC GATE is always OFF Handshaking Data is output after confirming DSA from the PLC Retry interval ms eee Mesue Set the communication retry interval 5 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Ethernet window closes Output control Done Handshaking Checking Communication Status Use PLC tools etc to check the communication status portant 8 amp w The communication time is different depending on the communication environment Make sure to verify on the actual usage environment before use The communication speed of the controllers for the FZ3 L35 9 3 8 O 7 UU series may be faster than the speed of the controllers for FZ3 9 9 O series depending on the conditions setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PL C Link Communication specifications such as link areas or communication speed and data length are set Reference Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link p 152 ESZS 1L 5 1 1 Before setting the communication specifications set the Serial RS 232C 422 communication module to PLC link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One or to PLC link MELSEC Q series in the case of a PLC by Mitsubishi Electric Corporat
175. eive Character strings received from external devices are displayed 6 Tap OK The Serial window closes Command Format Non procedure This section explains the format of commands used in non procedure method Japanese characters cannot be used To load a scene etc set the file name beforehand using characters other than Japanese When Ethernet is used For Ethernet connections delimiters are not required at the end of commands As with scene number acquisition commands when acquisition data and an OK response exist next to each other a space 0 x 20 is inserted between the acquisition data and the OK response and this information is grouped and sent as one packet Reference Command List Non procedure p 186 Input format example When using DISPCOND to acquire the display status Command format Response format Display slate FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 185 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N rrtt 1 1 Ll With serial data output when Ethernet output is set up to 128 processing units can be registered Note however that not all data may be received depending on the network environment being used PC performance and the software for receiving data When serial interface RS 232C 422 connection i
176. elect the Image Display area Sub image Image Mode List Changes can be made in the ADJUST window Item Description Throuah The latest image is always loaded from the camera and displayed 3 When Through is selected saved images cannot be called up for measurement EN The image that was scanned in the immediately preceding measurement is displayed Images can be updated at any time during measurement 84 Arranging the RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual The latest NG error image resulting from an overall judgement is displayed The latest measurement results are always shown in overall judgement and measurement time In this case the overall judgement result and measurement time may conflict with the camera images Also during continuous measurement Last NG cannot be displayed Last NG Note Tapping the Image Display area or flow when Last NG is displayed and made active clears the screen Be sure to capture Last NG before performing any other operation If a measurement trigger is input during multi input status or immediately after BUSY is turned off during display update processing etc Last NG cannot be displayed Display Last NG Image fulfills a similar function as a processing item in which up to 4 NG error images can be saved If this processing item is used Last NG can be acquired without operation having any effect on acquisition FZ3 User s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 85 uoneJedo Bunjejg u
177. ement With operation during measurement the following items can be changed Operation when the next STEP signal is input during measurement Saving of scene groups during scene group switching The Measurement Setting window is displayed 2 Set each item as required 1 On the Main screen tap the Measure menu Measure setting When they are not displayed create settings through the System menu Controller Create shortcut Measurement seting STEP in measure v ERROR ON ERROR OFF Scone group zwilch fA Savas scene frole on scene isltch Scene switch Lise Add Lime nz Hera Set value Factory default STEP in ERROR ON Sets whether the ERROR signal output turns on when the measure ERROR OFF following STEP signals are input during measurement Sets operation when scene group switching is performed Sets Description Save scene whether the scene group is saved when it is switched The scene Checked dM l l group on Unchecked group switching time can be reduced if the check is removed scene switch but if the power is turned off without saving when settings have been changed the changed contents will be cleared EN The BUSY signal is turned on during scene switching When this switch time O to 1000 Add time 10 ms time is short and the change from ON to OFF cannot be detected by external devices the BUSY signal ON time can be added This is setin 1 ms units The d
178. emoval Filter Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Transfer source image 100 Set Get 0 to 9 number 101 Image number after transfer Set Get 0 to 9 102 Target image Set Get ange dk 1 Prev unit image 103 Display image Set Get M mae pope cL 1 Image after processing 0 Light 200 Defect brightness Set Get 1 Dark 2 Light and dark 0 Normal 1 Vertical stripes 201 Background pattern Set Get 2oBSHeontal SIDES 3 Lattice 202 Background pattern presence Set Get HE 296 Compensate image FZ3 User s Manual Vertical and horizontal width 3 to 63 ou of square filter PRESE Pattern kind Lattice 3 to 63 301 Vertical width of vertical filter Set Get Daten kna tatie Horizontal width of horizontal 3 to 63 3 to 63 3 Pattern kind Normal vertical stripes horizontal stripes 350 Set Get Contrast 1 to 63 303 Defect size Set Get Halation Cut 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 RB ratio adjustment Set Get 100 to 100 121 Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 122 Filtered image Set Get P RAY MASS PHOTO SIGE 1 Filtered image 200 Transfer source image number Set Get 0 to 9 201 Image number after transfer Set Get 0 to 9 Panoramat 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result N
179. ent displayed on the monitor as an image Reference Set the save destination for captured images p 106 2 LCD Off Displayed only with LCD integrated controllers Turns off power to the LCD monitor Tap the bottom of the monitor screen to turn on power to the LCD monitor again uoneJedo eJojeg Layout of Edit Flow Window This window is for compiling the measurement flow Flow parts are displayed on the right side and the measurement flow is displayed on the left If the measurement trigger is activated processing is executed in sequence starting from the top of the flow d 3 i amt Fea Ipsi EI es TC J L i nw I th Fide mum Es Se Semm barh i Edp Paduae FEE M ti ie Er fei Seer p m pe uum R E P Aaa dd ias b ES E Deer mM f Er b Daran ema Impr mcm ig hj eiF b EE t m Eggs Pop duci m I kr ia Fe aj Can Edra hiii E A Dir Deal v Wo Sie by ard orna nt B E latere r l li abair ey Labe Data _ m Dua c f j Prode Detect m Pre Figli e a LCD uff 2 e a Unit List Lists the processing units included in the flow You can create a flow for a scene by adding processing items to the unit list b Property Setting Buttons Displays the property setting window where detailed settings can be performed c End Marker Indicates th
180. erence Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 65 Up to 32 scenes can be set In case where over 32 scenes are required these can be divided into scene groups for easier management Reference What Is a Scene Group p 46 Scene Examples The processing items registered to the scene are called processing units In the Edit Flow window where scenes are created select processing items required for measurement and add them to the flow The number at the top of the processing unit is called the Unit No If the measurement trigger is activated processing is executed in the numerical sequence of the processing unit numbers 42 What Is a Scene FZ3 User s Manual Processing unit Mo e ix D Example Normal measurement Display Image Cadqera rans faut T Faziani peng Pee Maling 2 Carry out position compensation 3 Check the defect 4 Output meas une ment results to external devices Note d pii ide eee or pe ae MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes The processing item Camera Image Input is set in processing unit 0 beforehand FZ3 User s Manual What Is a Scene 43 MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Bues E Example When adding Position Compensation for two measurement objects in the same field of view otart 0 Display Image Came Ima inar 1 55min AETI EST mmis Bi LP ana md Plin M fee Carry aut P
181. erence 256 Shift area 64 Simplified non stop adjustment 93 Single line High speed mode 35 Skipping angle 318 Startup setting 133 STEP in measure 130 STEP setting 141 Stripes Removal Filter External Reference 286 Sub image No 84 Subnet mask 154 182 242 Sub pixel Terminology Explanation 326 Synchronization output 222 SYSDATA 204 SYSLOAD 207 SYSSAVE 207 System data saving 120 FZ3 User s Manual W Z System environment settings 127 System information 145 System initialization 27 System restart 27 Test measurement 17 Text 329 Time 344 Timing chart 228 Timing chart PLC Link 174 Timing chart EtherNet IP 219 Touch pen 25 Trackball 25 Trapezoidal Correction External Reference 282 Trend Monitor 95 Trend Monitor External Reference 292 Trigger delay 128 Unit Terminology Explanation 328 UNITDATA 208 Upper limit 351 Value input 329 VERGET 210 Wait External Reference 294 Zoom function 333 359 Authorized Distributor
182. erent objects for packaging that has plain background Reference Processing ltem List Manual Search p 48 When accuracy is required for inspection of mixing of different objects When not all characters and markings are the same When performing different inspections according to the type Fine Matching Effective when precision is required for inspection of mixing of different objects such as inspection of nameplates and objects other than those with plain backgrounds Reference Processing Item List Manual Fine Matching p 231 Sensitive Search Effective when the difference between the model image and measurement image is small The models are automatically finely divided and matched in detail Reference Processing Item List Manual Sensitive Search p 68 Classification Effective for inspections performed on lines where different types of products are manufactured Reference Processing ltem List Manual Classification p 110 Checking for deformation Method objective References Deformation check when there are multiple acceptable shapes When measuring the shape more strictly FZ3 User s Manual Flexible Search Effective when performing inspection for deformation of measurement objects based on multiple acceptable shapes Reference Processing ltem List Manual Flexible Search p 59 Fine Matching Effective when inspecting the shape of workpieces to a
183. err 174 Ladder Program Example PLC Link Pana Er aE TETE ETEL M E EIEE TERA N AAA EL LEE EEE ELIAS EE AL TSE ne 178 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 8 179 Communication Processing Flow Non procedure HH 179 Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet Non procedure 688 179 Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure 66 183 Checking Communication Status Non procedure PR 184 Command Format Non procedure A E EAE LVIPE IECUR EU DI LE Eds IU PR LIPS LO d ca dst 185 Command List Non procedure Wodrdexin ual ve epa CM SEU UA Ma a rM Ap MEE Eq Ka UA A LA d we 186 Output Format Non procedure crc cate 211 Control Output through EtherNet IP e n HHRHHHHHHHK HRK IHIHHH HIHHRHHHHHHHHH 214 Communication Processing Flow EtherNet IP HH 214 Setting Communication Specifications EtherNet IP n 215 Memory Allocation EtherNet IP ace ar wre fe aa Save D OK NM C IMP KIM DIE IR LU pm era ud EA E E Denm 247 Command Control EtherNet IP conn 219 Data Output EtherNet IP sesssssssssesuesussssescosesssesseossesseseeossesuesesesssosesseessesseoseeseeseeoseesee 219 Timing Chart EtherNet IP faa ao sawed RV RM VER Ra ea Ras a aat ea Pa d RU NOD UON a E RETE RR T ER dU 219 FZ3 User s Manual 3 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication ee RO NR ROADS RR Cee RA Ce eRe Ce RR E B CR c C a 8 ca 221 Setting C
184. es Reference I O Format Parallel Interface p 224 Parallel communication can only be set at line 0 Line 1 uses the settings of line O Date time setting language setting and operation mode setting can be set at line O only If STEP is input to line O and line 1 at exactly the same time measurement on one side may be delayed approximately by a time corresponding to the camera image input unit Error messages are the same If an error occurs on either line an error message is displayed If logging is performed for line O and line 1 at the same time measurement may take a longer time User data of line 1 is saved in the controller Non stop Adjustment Mode The measurement flow can be changed and adjusted during operation without stopping the measurement process Set images using saved image files The modified measurement flow can be reflected during operation Utilization example of non stop adjustment a D EES j 1 Sei beforehand that NIS igsiges will be sayen i A a ae of Pda 1 In the Control area of the Main screen RUN window tap Tool box 2 Tap Enter non stop adj Transfers to non stop adjustment mode Measurement will continue without stopping 38 Setting Operation Mode FZ3 User s Manual 3 Tap the icon of the processing unit to be adjusted To change the flow do so by selecting Edit flow in the toolbar Fiti leat Wi unit Hext Ai
185. ess 5 cessing y Measurement processes are not performed in parallel 2 CPUs FZ3 9 O0 H9 OO only ET EH Tee eGTEH ee m cir amera OCAS sing shortest takt time teg E CPU D processing EN amera Dnmocessnhg Megasi erigit Drogas Camera processing n M i Pihla D M amp asurernent process Iri eng y f ful Camera processing j 36 Setting Operation Mode FZ3 User s Manual Multi line Random trigger Mode Use this mode if you want to measure 2 lines using 1 controller Measurement can be performed independently on line 0 and line 1 in response to inputs from different cameras You can switch the monitoring target between line O and line 1 using the Line button in the Image display setting area LineO Line Sam Vire aam uU Xem Tao Hb Soom View Maie Ds Gydem Tol Fh rx Scgne A OJUS T NETTEN E Simal ampi HA Il Scimnn yroiip Il ADJILUS ll Scrum E LL Signe awapa ALAS ms Ir TIT rms Freezn 5 Camera No Recognition in software Camera 0 Camera 0 on line 0 Camera 1 Camera 0 on line 1 Camera 2 Camera 1 on line O Camera 3 Camera 1 on line 1 FZ3 User s Manual Setting Operation Mode 37 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg portant 1 hw If Ethernet is used set a different port number for each line RS 232C 422 can be set at line O only If parallel communication is used the I O format chang
186. esults of control commands described in the Command area are written The output data accompanying measurement is written to the Data Output area 214 Control Output through EtherNet IP FZ3 User s Manual External Devices Controller FZ3 Command area Command data to the controller is written Gontrol input Command code Command parameters Command written to the command area is executed Response area Execution results are written to the PLC response area Execution results from the Control output controller are written Command code Hesponse code Hesponse data Data output area Output data accompanying Output data from the measurement is written to controller is written the data output area Output data O to 7 The signal timing is equivalent to the standard parallel I O where command execution and data output are executed independently oetting Communication Specifications EtherNet IP Set the communication specifications such as the output control ESZS 1 LL 1 1 Set the communication module to EtherNet IP before setting the communication specifications Save the setting to the controller and then restart the system Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 When connecting FZ3 to a CJ series EtherNet IP Unit the EDS file in which the FZ3 connection information has been defined needs to be installed on the tool Network Configurator
187. et 0 to 99 170 Count Set Get O to 100 0 Fast 171 Sub pixel detection method Set Get 1 Normal 2 Fine 173 Search level Set Get SUMI 1 Manual 174 Upper limit of search level Set Get 2to5 176 Sort condition Set Get 0 to 5 180 Judgement upper limit for number Set Get 0 to 100 of detections 181 Judgement lower limit of number of Set Get 0 to 100 detections 182 REIN Upper IMEG MEASUTS seat 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 183 oe Ower imlo measur sauce 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 184 oe MDDCSIIEODInSSSURe bearer 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 185 ooo OWEN IMPOR Meas Une eiie 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 186 Judgement upper limit for angle Set Get 180 to 180 187 Judgement lower limit for angle Set Get 180 to 180 188 Judgement upper limit for Set Get 0 to 100 correlation value 189 Judgement lower limit for Set Get 0 to 100 correlation value 1000 Nx6 N 0 to 99 Correlation O to 99 Get O to 100 nU Oe Position X 0 to 99 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 N 0 to 99 d REC Position Y O to 99 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 N 0 to 99 1000 Nx6 3 N 0 to 99 Measurement angle 0 to 99 Get 180 to 180 1000 Nx6 4 TNT N 0 to 99 Magnification MX O to 99 Get 90 to 110 1000 Nx6 5 CER N 0 to 99 Magnification MY O to 99 Get 90 to 110 256 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Classification 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 1 No models found 1 No models found 8 99999
188. eujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuopneg o List of Sub Image Numbers Classification Processing item Sub image number and display 2D measurement Switching 86 ECM Search Edge Position Edge Pitch Scan Edge Position Measurement image Measurement image displayed with matching edges overlaid Measurement image Profile display Measurement image Profile display Measurement image Scan region Scan Edge Width Gravity and Area Labeling Labeling Measurement image Scan region Measurement image Extracted image Measurement image Extracted image Measurement image Color extraction image Defect Precise Defect Fine Matching gt O O77 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0c Measurement Image Position i Compensation Trapezoidal Correction Extract Color Filter Measurement image Defect profile when area measurement is present Measurement image Defect profile when area measurement is present Measurement image Difference image display Reset image Measurement image After compensation Before compensation 0 Post conversion image Color extraction image Measurement image Stripes Removal Filter Halation Cut Polar Transformation Display Image File 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 Post conversion image Col
189. ference About image logging When the number of files in the save destination folder increases the time needed for image saving increases If Camera Image Input is used several times in a flow the image from the last Camera Image Input is saved If image transfer is disabled using the camera selection setting for the Camera Image Input unit black images are saved instead of images from the disabled camera About number of images that can be saved This will vary depending on the size of the images and the resolution of the connected number of the camera The number of images that can be saved on the RAMDisk or USBDisk depends on free capacity If RAMDisk is selected this depends on the RAMDisk memory capacity If USBDisk is selected this depends on the USBDisk capacity Note that the following restrictions apply to USBDisk When saving image files directly under the root directory the number of images that can be saved is about 126 When saving in sub folders USBDisk SUB etc a maximum of 999 images can be saved in each folder Change to a different folder to save another 999 images up to the maximum memory capacity Analyzing Logging Data Acquired data is referred to and processed and settings are analyzed Checking Logging Data with a PC This section uses the example of saving logging data in the USB memory 1 Copy logging data saved to the USB memory to the PC 2 Open folder with copied data ij C Pci ee Tode
190. for a logging image when multiple cameras are connected use the lt lt and gt gt buttons to switch images lage count Z 5 Tap OK The path and file name of the image are displayed under Select image 90 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual 6 Check Measure using selected img Re meas D Scene group 0 0 Scene O Signal qutput OFF Freeze Edit flaw P fatasave amp Scone switch mo Measure F Test measu emen Output Continues meas 2 Cal ibrationt EE D a a Documents OMRON FORAMDIsk cap bmp Measure using selected imgiFre meas E A mRe meas Monitoring Judgemen i ri F Flow Tap Measure in the toolbar on the Main screen 1 5cene group EZ Edit Now D Scene Oo Signal output OFF Freeze Measurement of the selected image is performed Note About Auto Re meas Displayed images can be automatically remeasured by placing a check in Auto Re meas When remeasuring an image with the controller it is necessary to have a camera connected that is appropriate to the image size For example if the image file for remeasurement contains 2 megapixel images and a 0 3 megapixel camera is connected to the controller or if a camera is not connected measurement will not be performed correctly due to a memory deficiency Perform remeasurement after connecting a camera appropriate to the image size Improving Adjus
191. ge fora corresponding moving tha Measurement area fora daflaction and retuming to the reference position carmesponding deflection Qmm ma Measurement will ba carried out after measured object enters int Measurement area Intelligent camera with lighting function Cameras with a dome shaped light can also be controlled with the controller This is beneficial when the effects of ambient light are to be avoided and when it is desirable to shorten the lighting setting time For details see Reference Intelligent Camera with Lighting Function p 24 Reference position The point that is always the reference If the location of the registered model is different from the reference position the setting should be changed in Ref position FZ3 User s Manual Terminology Explanations 325 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Calibration This refers to conversion of measured pixel unit dimensions to actual dimensions Setting the relationship between actual coordinates and camera coordinates enables conversion of measurement results in pixel units to actual dimensions To output measured values converted by calibration to external devices set Calibration in Output parameter of each unit to ON For example in the case of an object that measures 20 mm wide and has a 200 pixel width in the measured image calibration is performed as follows 20 mm 200 pixel 0 1 mm pixel In other words 1 pixel pix in the camera
192. ges beforehand into the OK folder containing images you want to judge OK or NG folder containing images you want to judge NG The applicable file types are IFZ BYR and BMP Do not input external commands or STEP signals while the NG analyser is running excluding during non stop adjustment 1 On the Main screen tap Tool menu NG analyser The analyser screen is displayed k Lut of anila Dalaslm ot oll Bedalig of dala re 1 m d t Lagi sha mad migu Fi ie pF ich ee ra a i M imMhLEE W imsLer L imbre Lrecule taich purer F s ubERSDh dele LT et Teh ee Len Of imkgee AG mapmT 2 Specify the image file Specify the upper rank folder containing the OK and NG folders Although logging images of the controller can be set as the target all logging images of the controller if selected are treated as Not yet judged Target Logging ieage Image File F You can also set a reference image to perform adjustment FZ3 User s Manual Using NG Analyser 111 oo Buis gt 3 The files in the folder are displayed Miss Judes K images 334 Ant HG images 5 li N images li 4 Tap Execute batch measurement All images in the folder are measured in batch Folder inFarnat ian OK images NG images 5 NC wares joo Buis gt 5 Measurement results are displayed The results in the
193. ges the shade of images so that irregularities are not as easily seen Weak smoothing Before filtering After filtering Median In comparison with smoothing Median allows for irregularities to be hidden without having to shade the edges of images When measurement images contain noise The filtering items Dilate and Erosion are both effective Dilate When there is dark noise in an image bright areas are enlarged to eliminate dark noise FZ3 User s Manual Key Points for Adjustment 79 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o Erosion When there is bright noise in an image bright areas are contracted to eliminate bright noise Erosion Before filtering After filtering When contrast of measurement images is low defect inspection is unstable The filtering items Extract vertical edges Extract horizontal edges and Extract edges are effective Extract vertical edges This extracts the vertical edges of an image Extract vertical edges Before filtering After filtering Extract horizontal edges This extracts the horizontal edges of an image Extract edges This extracts the all edges of an image When unidentifiable shapes are present The filtering item Extract edges is effective Extract edges This is used to make the profile clearer and the shape more identifiable Extract edges Before filtering After filtering
194. gle is 5 Registration model _ Reference 10 A SAAANA g Candidate Point Level This is the level used for finding models when searching Images with a correlation value higher than the candidate point level are used to establish candidate points for search inspection FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 319 sexipueddy o sexipueddy E Roughly search within Petom detailed ihe search region for searches in Ihe areas candidate points around each candidate point Edge Detection Measurement This method extracts parts with color changes as edges to perform measurement Edges are found through color changes in the measurement region It finds edges using color changes in the measurement region When calulating the X coordinate of this edge Measure ment M I 1 region T Edge Level Indicates the edge color change level degree of color difference This level is adjusted if edges cannot be accurately detected Note The value 0 to 100 for the edge level indicates the edge intensity It is not related to color differences in the original image For case of measurement using relative position 96 with regards to width of color difference The edges are detected in the following manner 1 Calculate the overall distribution of color difference in the measurement region 2 Min color difference value 096 Max color difference value 10096 3 Locations in which there is an edge level color
195. gnal When phase A BEEN Sets the timing for starting the pulse count ENABLE ENABLE start Counts the pulses input during the Enable measurement trigger receipt period n start l timing STEP start STEP start Does not count pulses even during the measurement trigger receipt period until the STEP signal is input Every trigger pulse Sets the timing for resetting Every When it is every rotation multiple settings for rotation phase A are possible Pulse Z Pulse A 0 to 65536 Sets how many pulses it takes for the trigger to be produced Pulse reset timing Support Checked pa klashing P Unchecked Sets whether the rotation direction is detected Trigger in Checked Sets whether a trigger is produced during reverse backlashing Unchecked rotation 140 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Sets the timing for starting the pulse count ENABLE start Counts the pulses input during the ENABLE l Enable measurement trigger receipt period timin zm STEP start Does not count pulses even during the J STEP start p 3 measurement trigger receipt period until the STEP signal is input iiia ios Every irigger Sets the timing for resetting timing pulse Pulse Z 0 to 1023 Sets how many pulses it takes for the trigger to be produced portent 1 lL The encoder trigger setting is disabled in the FZ3 L35 C series Setting the STEP Input Detection Pulse Wi
196. he Date and Time Date time Setting Confirm that the date and time on the embedded calendar are correct and make corrections if they are not The log data dates and times etc are set based on contents set here 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Date time setting The Date time Setting window is displayed 2 Setthe date and time ET FLUE d 10 FITEITTT 3 1 15 15 17 18119 20 Z 12 13 3 dm J5 27 9B 36 eg ce i 29 30 31 Today 7 25 2007 1 Tap the date that is to be set 2 Setthe time 3 Tap OK The Date time Setting window closes selecting the Language Language Setting Sets the language used for the characters displayed on the screen Messages in the application software will be displayed in Japanese or English depending on the language selected here FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 131 ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu 5 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o Note When a controller with default factory settings is started up the Language Setting window is automatically displayed The controller factory default setting is Japanese language display If the language setting is changed to English the system automatically restarts 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Language setting The Language Setting window is displayed 2 Tap and select a language Dalect l nguags
197. he memory used by all applications By confirming available memory this provides a rough standard for confirming status FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 145 JUBSWUOJIAUQ uJajs S y BulbuUeUD 5 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o while operating Available data memory FZ3 L35 9 FZ3 39 9 H38 9 FZ3 79 9 H7 9 9 only The data memory is the amount of memory that can be used for scene group data Check the available memory that can be used for unit data and settings data for each unit 4 Tap Close 146 The System Information window closes Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 147 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y DBuiDueu 5 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOU 9 148 Methods for Connecting and Communicating with External Devices This chapter describes communication with external devices such as PCs and programmable controllers etc Reference About Connecting with External Devices p 149 il Reference Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link p 152 amp Reference Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure p 179 Reference Control Output through EtherNet IP p 214 i amp Reference Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication p 221 i Reference Externally Outputting Data through FTP p 241 FZ3 User s
198. he output status will be maintained even after measurement is complete However when One shot OR signal is on in Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 221 the OR signal will turn off after the set output time has elapsed The output signal factory default setting is OFF but the signal may be ON for approximately 0 5 second when power is turned on Be careful of signal loading occurring at external devices Timing Chart Here I O timings of various commands are described Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 228 Reference When Output Control Is Set to Handshaking p 232 Reference When Output Control Is Set to Synchronization Output p 233 Reference Scene Scene Group Switch p 234 Reference Clears measurement value by the parallel command p 236 Reference Clears the OR and DO signal by the parallel command p 237 Reference Clears error by the parallel command p 238 Reference About Multiple Image Input Function p 239 When Output Control Is Set to None Output the measurement results if controller is not synchronous with external devices Have the external devices detect the GATE signal of the controller and load DO signal during ON status Inputting a measurement trigger in the STEP signal Example 1 When 3 expressions are set in Parallel Data Output RUN BUSY OR DO GATE 228 Start Measurement Exite Measurement OFF
199. high degree of precision Reference Processing ltem List Manual Fine Matching p 231 Processing Item Selection Guidelines 61 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E Inspecting characters Method wie References objective Date Verification Inspection of the Effective when inspecting date character strings that show the production date etc The date verification date can be set automatically Reference Processing ltem List Manual Date Verification p 250 Inspection of Character Inspection arbitrary Effective when inspecting arbitrary character strings character strings Reference Processing Item List Manual Character Inspection p 242 Model Dictionary Registration of To inspect character strings with Date Verification or Character Inspection register the target character strings character strings with Model Dictionary Reference Processing ltem List Manual Model Dictionary p 259 Reading barcodes Method objective References Barcode FZ3 Hxxx series Effective when reading barcodes and outputting the information to an external device Reference Processing ltem List Manual Barcodes p 267 When reading barcodes Reading 2D codes Method objective References 2D Code FZ3 Hxxx series Effective when reading 2D codes for classification etc Reference Processing Items List Manual 2D Codes p 275
200. his is the trigger signal to clear a measurement value After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 ON after an interval over 1 ms BUSY signal is ON during execution of commands After checking that the BUSY signal has turned DI ON turn DI7 OFF and then turn DIO to 6 OFF Note however that the amount of time during which the BUSY signal is turned ON is approximately 1 ms If it cannot be recognized whether the BUSY signal is turned ON or not by an external device control the timing so that the DI7 signal is turned ON for approximately 5 ms seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey 236 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Clears the OR and DO signal by the parallel command Starting the measurement Exiting the measurement OFF RUN m EE ON Pa STEP input OFF BUSY ON Command execution OFF OR DO GATE Do e KL OFF if DI7 ON Output signal Signal Function RUN Turns ON when the controller is set to the RUN window Turns OFF in the ADJUST window This does not change when the OR and DO signal is being cleared READY Do not however clear the OR and DO signal when the READY signal is turned OFF The command will not be executed correctly This does not change when the OR and DO signal is being cleared BUSY Do not however clear the OR and DO signal when the BUSY signal is turned ON The command will not be executed correctly OR It
201. i odes a ace MP IU aioe eae ee ee 131 Selecting the Language Language Setting POUR 131 Setting the Fan Rotation Speed Fan Control Setting ttt ees 132 Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting SMa area d C MEE E EE DURUM E EREMODE MU RV REIEE ROTE ES 133 Setting the RUN Window Display RUN mode View Setting 138 Setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut HH 138 Setting the Encoder Trigger Encoder Trigger Setting 139 Setting the STEP Input Detection Pulse Width STEP Setting 8088 141 Setting the RUN Window Password Password Setting 142 Setting a Network Drive Network Drive Setting m 143 Checking System Information System Information HH 145 7 Methods for Connecting and Communicating with External Devices veee 148 About Connecting with External Devices eeeRRHMMMMHHHRRRHeRRRRRRSRBBnMMBIRS SeeHeHeMeIenmnMIHeHemnIeHHeeen 149 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link MH 152 Communication Processing Flow PLC Link bas Aie ecu bur rai he A se M Ld AM he dh i 152 Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link M 152 Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link e e tet e eet 157 Memory Allocation PLC Link 161 Command Control PLC Link EM 163 Data Output PLC Link HH 174 Timing Chart PLC Link See CR eee eT TT COR RA QD ARR Cu at CU QR RR CR CAR RR a ROCA OUR D ORTU UR ORO eee rer et
202. ication The EtherNet IP communication specification is described The conformance test applies to Ver A7 Before establishing the communication specify the sending and receiving area settings on the external device For details refer to the Instruction Manual of the device being used Send area Command area Item Setting description Tag set connection 1 Communication direction Target Originator FZ3 Tag 1 Data size 20 bytes Command area Receiving area Response area Data Output area Item Setting description Tag set connection 1 Communication direction Originator FZ3 Target Tag 1 Data size 48 bytes Response area Data Output area ESSZS 1 11 f EtherNet IP communication is performed with a PLC model that does not support cyclic communication AssemblyObject setting is required In addition depending on the PLC model AssemblyObject setting may be required even when cyclic communication is supported Set the AssemblyObject class specification in the following manner Class ID 4 Instance ID 100 input 101 output Communication Processing Flow EtherNet IP Communication between the external device and FZ3 is performed using the 3 areas indicated below the Command area Response area and Data area The Command area is used when control commands are sent from the PLC to the FZ3 The FZ3 can be controlled by writing commands to the Command area In the Response area the execution r
203. ication PLC Link 155 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuiex3 uy Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse 156 Set whether or not to provide an interlock with the PLC when performing data output Out utcontrol None None Data is output regardless of the Handshaking status of signals from the PLC GATE is always OFF Handshaking Data is output after confirming DSA from the PLC 1000 to 999999 Retry interval ms 10000 Set the communication retry interval PLC by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Ethernet PLC Link Setting Command ares Area i Data register Address Razponse ares Area i Data rag ziar Address w Data lutputL arga Area ata resister Address Vulput contro lt Handshak ing Retry interval msi 10000 gt Help Ok Cancel TA Setting value Setting item Tests delaui Description Command area Data register Area File register Set the Command area Link register 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Address 0 Command area Response area Data register Area File register Set the Response area Link register 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Address 100 Response area Data output area Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Data register Area File register Set the Data output area Link r
204. inute Second Date 2 digits Hour 2 digits Minute 2 digits Second 2 digits Note Hour 2 digits Minute 2 digits and Second 2 digits can be omitted during setting Settings cannot be updated when these are omitted however and the previous time will be kept unchanged Allowable omission patterns include omitting second only omitting minute and lt second gt omitting hour minute and lt second gt Patterns that cannot be used include omitting hour only and omitting minute only Example When changing the date and time to 8 30 2007 12 30 00 Command DIA T E 2 0 0 7 0 8 3 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 Cri Response DISPCOND Acquiring the current image display status Acquires the currently displayed image mode Command format Response format When processing is performed normally 192 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Display state Cp OJK When processing is not performed normally EIR cs lt Parameters explanation gt 0 Through View State 1 Freeze or Freeze and Last NG together 2 Last NG Example When the current image mode is Through lt Command gt DiI S P CIOINI DI9s lt Response gt OR Changing current image display status Changes the currently displayed image mode lt Command format gt LLL Display image mode No Response f
205. ion save the setting to the controller and then restart the system When the system is restarted the communication settings are initialized Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device If the operation mode FZ3 9 M O H9 C only is Multi line random trigger mode RS232C 422 PLC link cannot be selected for line 1 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial RS 232C RS 422 The serial interface window is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 157 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey 158 2 Inthe communication setting area set the following items FLC Link Interface Baud pate bps J _ Cate length bit Pariku 1 Eyar Slop bit bii Fier central Bone Tingpmsk s A Hale ile Conca i Setting value S D ee Setting item acters clean escription RS 232C I TEF X Interface RS 422 Note 3 Adjust to the PLC communication specifications 2400 4800 Band rate ao bps Note 1 19200 Adjust to the PLC communication specifications i 38400 57600 115200 Data length bit Note 2 Parity Adjust to the PLC communication specifications Stop bit b
206. ipueddy E ame a Example When adjusting the width of the circumference Drag a point on the inner circle A Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows Hide cirela Fide circle Center Position T Center Position t 326 aa 3 ez 2 L gt Badius wha Pidth Arc Image selection status Points are displayed on two lines at both ends of the arcs on the inner arc on the outer arc and inside the closed arc shape Dimension Adjustment Drag the points 340 Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual Example When enlarging an arc Drag the point inside the arc outward Example When adjusting the width of an arc Drag a point on the inner or outer arc inward or outward Example When changing the angle of arc part that is open Drag one of the points at the end of the arc Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into three Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 341 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Stark angie Qm Ed ES Center Fossli ion t a me e 4 Fide arc End angie iv Center Pasii Lon T Pie j Radlus li Fidth eT Crosshair Cursor 342 Image selection status ao Ent
207. ire image is selected Using numbers for setting De IES Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows The line type and line color can also be changed at this window Central T wmEL weje Elyiei scli oo Em wd EIIETW is Calor i DK Color T Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual Polygons Triangle to Decagon Drawing methods for drawing a quadrilateral 1 When Polygon is specified a triangle is drawn at first 2 If you drag and drop one of the sides at the point you want to make a new vertex a new vertex will be created If the number of vertexes is not within 3 to 10 the image cannot be confirmed as a polygon Image selection status LN Points are displayed at the vertexes of the figure Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When changing the angle of one point Drag point arbitrarily Example When changing the region Drag point arbitrarily Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 3493 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Center Por t ton Pogilion Text Image selection status Entire image is selected Note Text can only be used in the Result display processing item Time Image selection status r OF OF
208. irmation window for overwriting is displayed 4 Tap Yes The copied scene data is written over the scene selected as the destination 5 Tap Close Clear scene settings and return to factory default values This section describes how to initialize measurement contents for each scene 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 Tap the scene to be cleared from scene list FZ3 User s Manual Editing Scenes 67 MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Bues E 3 Tap Clear A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap Yes Scene data is cleared 5 Tap Close Arbitrary descriptions can be added to each scene This is convenient for making settings more easily understandable when managing many scenes 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 Tap the scene to be renamed from scene list 68 Editing Scenes FZ3 User s Manual 3 Set Scene name Author and Note icena groue a Ta Swilch Tm Edit Scene group nass cene group m ls Scena Sc ne 1 I Scene f scmne 3 4 Scane 4 Scane 5 I Scene Seene 7 oane Scmne Stene Ii apane TI ecana 12 ocene 13 sebne ld tape 15 Scama 16 Scene i cerenm IB Scape 18 Hy Clear Se j ee i ri a E a 1 Tap fo
209. isplayed value can be changed in 5 ms increments by tapping lt and gt Note The settings of Save scene group on scene switch are linked with the settings of the Switch Scene Group window Settings specified later override the previous ones Reference Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 65 3 Tap OK The display returns to the Main screen Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement FZ3 User s Manual oetting the System Operation Environment Sets the controller s operation environment The following settings are available Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference b d Setting the Date and Time Date time Setting p 131 Selecting the Language Language Setting p 131 Setting the Fan Rotation Speed Fan Control Setting p 132 Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 Setting the RUN Window Display RUN mode View Setting p 138 Setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut p 138 Setting the Encoder Trigger Encoder Trigger Setting p 139 Setting the STEP Input Detection Pulse Width STEP Setting p 141 Setting the RUN Window Password Password Setting p 142 Setting a Network Drive Network Drive Setting p 143 In addition the controller model and measurement application version can be checked Reference Checking System Information System Information p 145 Setting t
210. it Flow control is not performed with software If the time in which there is no response from external devices reaches the timeout setting time a timeout error occurs and an Fow control error message is displayed in the window The parallel interface ERROR signal also turns on Xon Xoff Flow control is performed with software Data is sent according to the Xon Xoff codes from external devices l 1 to 120 TT l l l Timeout s Set the time in which a timeout error will occur in seconds 5 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Note 1 If a speed of 38400 bps or higher is selected effective communication cannot be guaranteed depending on the cable length because speeds of over 20 kbps are not defined in RS 232C standards In this case set the communication speed at 19200 bps or lower Note 2 With the RS 232C MELSEC Q series set the data length to 8 Note 3 With the MELSEC Q series RS 422 cannot be used 3 Tap PLC Link setting The PLC Link Setting window is displayed 4 Setthe following items R5 23206 422 PLE Link Selling Lommam area Arb Da La register Addrezz Response ares Area Date register Airt i Data Dulput ares Ars i Data register Address Dulput control Handshak ing Retry interval ms 1000 IN gt Hele Lk Lanes ee Setting value Setting item IE Description Command area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR
211. it number Set Get 0 to 9999 0 Not update 128 Auto Update 1 First measurement after startup 2 Always update 0 0 129 Zero suppress 1 Space 0 Month gt Day 130 Calculation order Set Get 1 Day Month 0 Last day of now 131 Month end adjust Set Get 1 First day of next 2 Gap day of next 133 Ahead margin Set Get 0 to 99 0 Not used 134 Code year 1 flag Set Get TN Sad 0 Not used 135 Code year 2 flag Set Get 1 Used 0 Not used 136 Code month 1 flag 1 Used 0 Not used 137 Code month 2 flag ies 0 Not used 138 Code day 1 flag Set Get 1 Used 0 Not used 139 Code day 2 flag Set Get 1 Used 0 Not used 140 Code hour 1 flag J lt Usad 0 Not used 141 Code hour 2 flag MU 142 Code minute 1 flag Set Get TUR 1 Used 143 Code minute 2 flag Set Get A ORHSRE 1 Used 160 Operation code number Set Get 0 to 99 276 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Model Dictionary 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 OFF 121 With rotation Set Get t ON 122 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 45 to 45 123 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 45 to 45 0 OFF Barcode No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Decoded character Get only 0 to CHAR NUM MAX 1 count 7 T character Gotony 0 to CHAR NUM MAX 1 characters 0 to INDEX NUM MAX 1 8 Index Get onl
212. ithout stopping the line ediisrmant moda I Want ta conduct inspection by giving i ISn speen prey bo xiggmg wW camaat mE k JEENE mode On mmsasuramernt gpaescd Note 1 Reference About Multiple Image Input Function p 228 High speed Logging Mode Normally one CPU is used to perform measurement image logging and image display The FZ3 9 ODO H9 ODO series performs processing using two CPUs with one CPU used exclusively for measurement and the other performing non measurement processing This ensures maximum measurement performance at all times Parallel operation High speed Mode Two CPUs are used to share and process measurement tasks internally Processing is executed in parallel to shorten the measurement time to maximal 5096 Parallel processing is performed for each processing unit to shorten the total processing time 32 Setting Operation Mode FZ3 User s Manual uoneJedo eJojeg Pd Gm Um Gm a o UND GNU OG O UNES UNUS UD GO US UNS UGG E mmm m m h i i i k 3 Betori Camera AE t un it M oso c Before fun T4 gt Search H Search A Search 7 aich ng Search i HEE wit J F SWAICUME parslial processing ag S y 1 s gt E um un ELLEN GE GEO GN NS AGE GENE ZONES GEDGEL GEO GEDOGE ZEE ZEOGESON m j i T i A p i i i er Gamera fa X Caere 5 Aftel perae 3 Search LEER Search 3 perallal processing TEES IFTE Ns Siitching Fi i
213. ition is difficult since the amount of time during which the BUSY signal is turned OFF during a continuous measurement by the parallel command is extremely short at 1 ms or less Acquires the OR signal at the time when the GATE signal turns ON after adding the parallel judgement output at the end of the flow FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 231 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N When Output Control Is Set to Handshaking Output the measurement results if controller is synchronous with external devices If this function is used when multiple measurement results are output in sequence it enables efficient and effective data transfer Inputting a measurement trigger in the STEP signal Example When 3 expressions are set in Parallel Data Output Start Measurement Exit Measurement OFF RUN ON re STEP input OFF m BUSY ON Dor M Perform Measurement OR Final judgment Output will be carried out independently from DSA when measurement is over DO GATE DSA iem lt a Overtime d Lovertime n on After completion of After GATE signal is ON After GATE signal is OFF many data measurement overtime overtime error is deemed if are output for every measurement error is deemed if DSA DSA signal isn t OFF within overtime error is deemed if DSA signal
214. itor BitevVord Display Bitimulti points S vvordirmulti points Device OOOO COR ees IFEDC 3BABB 17654 413210 eooc M 1B bit integer f 32 hit integer Realfsingle Realidouble ASCII D 100 OOOO GOGO OOOO OOOO Diii QOOO e609 O00 OO00 01003 COCK OOOO OOOO 00899 D1004 OBOD OO8 80 O00 OOOO pV 005 OOOO OOOO QOOO eooo Data is stored to the PLC I O memory as follows for a decimal number per channel DM1000 1000 ol 3099 sexipueddy E 354 Memory Display Image on PLC I O BY Decimal U Hexadecimal J FZ3 User s Manual FZ3 User s Manual Memory Display Image on PLC I O 355 sexipueddy o sexipueddy o The manual revision symbol is an alphabet appended at the end of the manual number found in the bottom left hand corner of the front or back cover Man No 2290 E1 01 gomm Revision No 01 Dec 2008 Software version upgrade fromVer 2 0 to Ver 2 1 Ver 2 1 i i i goo oo 02 Oct 2009 Special function corresponding to FZ3 9 H9 Ver 3 0 series 23200 00 700 oo i 03 Feb 2010 FZ3 3 H3 I H7 series supports the newly added functions 04 Jan 2011 Software version upgrade and new functions are added Ver 3 4 356 Manual Revision History FZ3 User s Manual Index Communication specifications Ethernet PLC nn Link 152 uibus M mas da bids En Communication specifications RS 232C 422 2 s complement Terminology Explanation 328 PLC Link 157 A
215. its of warning upper Hit Limits or warning Judgment lower Hrnit vamin If the measurement value is within the alarm range the Warning message is shown on the screen If a result output related processing item is used this allows for output to external devices when a warning occurs Through trend monitor judgement trends can be managed and NG error images can be saved To save only NG error images identified by trend monitor judgement create settings so that overall judgements from processing units other than Trend Monitor are not included in judgement Logging Measurement Values and Measurement Images Logging is a function for saving camera input images or measurement results when executing measurement There are 2 different logging methods When logging images that are currently displayed Reference Logging current image Save last logging image p 97 When automatically logging images during measurement Reference Setting Logging Conditions Logging setting p 98 Images and measurement data can be saved in USB memory which makes them useful for the 96 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual following kinds of adjustment HERE EAH oH AIN LL ALILI Optimization of threshokls Verify measured cata and NG images a E x 1 88 L Statistical analysis via Excel n LUI LONG BE xii Aaii H Rk DEI o a EEn HE d B Bio isE5 mE LE D A Logging Current
216. ject Sel Sub prixef of measurement parameter to es Search n 4 um int bh db me cm ccm cmo AO S a aw Calculation J Fimxible Search Nan speniic object For tag with specihed color Es Gravity and Area FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 51 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Bues E Locating Measurement Objects Inclined Specific object Locating marking Shape of locating tag eds Non specific object For tag with specified colar Internal and External Inspection s shane of marking changed Judgment condition la marking oblique occasionally Judged by color foie Judge by color difference ie 52 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FProcltem name Circle Angle Specify the Rotation angle of measurement perameter Pracitem name FZ3 User s Manual Presence Inspection Is shape of lag non specific For specie snape For non spectit shape For tag with specific color Dimension Inspection Measurement Longitudinal ar transverse FZ3 User s Manual ls shape af marking changed Is marking oblique Procllem name Flexible Search Gravity and Ares Procltam name Processing Item Selection Guidelines 53 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes Burr Inspection Procitem name Defect Text Comparison Inspection Do you want to set the date to be
217. jeg Left hin m Press the left mouse button once Perform when selecting items etc Note This document primarily describes operations using the term tapping When using a mouse or trackball read Tapping to mean Clicking Move the mouse by holding down the left mouse button Move the mouse with the left mouse button held down 26 Input Operations FZ3 User s Manual All controller settings can be restored to factory default status initialization In addition the controller can be restarted Reference Initializing Controller System Initialization p 27 Reference Restarting Controller System Restart p 27 Restores the controller to factory default status Before initialization back up required data such as scene data and system data Reference Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device p 120 1 On the Main screen tap System Controller System initialization The System Initialization window is displayed 2 Tap Execute A confirmation window is displayed 3 Tap Yes Restart the controller Before restarting back up required data such as scene data and system data Reference Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory p 118 1 On the Main screen tap System Controller System restart The System Restart window is displayed 2 Tap OK The controller restarts FZ3 User s Manual Returning Controller to Factory Settings 27 uoneJedo e
218. l OFF when the DSA Pe ey signal turns OFF ON a SSC DATA 4 Turn the DSA signal ON when the next OFF data is requested titi GINA For data output without handshaking EO 0 ll Set the data output cycle and time so that the following conditions are satisfied Set the timeout setting so that the PLC timeout time is longer than the measurement processing time Set the measurement tact interval so that the measurement tact interval is longer than the measurement processing time Set an output cycle that is longer than the output time but shorter than the measurement interval Set the output time that is longer than the PLC cycle time and the EtherNet IP communication cycle Since a reasonable amount of measurement tact time is required to have stable communications in an operation under high load verify the operation under the conditions that are to be actually applied Since a large portion of the CPU load is allocated to measurement processing while the multiple input function is being used a reduction in the performance such as delayed response and packet loss or a communication error may occur Do not use EtherNet IP communication when the multiple input function is being used If the measurement interval is short a communication error may occur depending on the measurement processing time and the PLC settings Set a PLC timeout time longer than the measurement processing time or increase the measurement intervals
219. l judgement This is determined when the measurement is completed BUSY signal ON OFF OR Selection of whether ON occurs during an OK judgement result or NG judgement result can be performed in the communication specifications settings window Reference amp Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 221 Outputs the results for expressions set in the processing item Parallel Judgement Output Parallel Data Output DO Selection of whether ON occurs during an OK judgement result or NG judgement result can be performed in the communication specifications settings window Reference amp Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 221 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 229 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Used to control the loading time of the DO signal to external devices ON for the time required for external devices to securely load the DO signal Set the output cycle so that the total output time is shorter than measurement interval input interval of STEP signal GATE GATE signal is output only when the Parallel judgement output and Parallel data output are set in the measurement flow and the output process begins when the signal passes through the parallel judgement output parallel data output point in the flow Depending on the
220. ld even after the power is turned off This is the area where images are temporarily stored when logging images using the On board logging function memory This memory is a ring memory and images will be overwritten starting with the oldest Controller image if the maximum number of save images is exceeded Can be used as a temporary file save destination Data is cleared if the controller power is turned off The RAMDisk data can be sent to or received from external devices using the FTP function RAM disk Used to back up settings data as a precaution to copy settings data to another USB memory controller and to load data to a PC To keep data save to the USB memory before turning off power to the controller During data transfer do not turn off the power When a message indicating that processing such as saving or loading is in progress is displayed do not restart the controller or turn off the power Data will be corrupted and the system will not work properly at the next startup Do not remove USB memory devices during saving or loading Operation of the controller may damage data or the USB memory Do not change the extension of saved files If changed the file cannot be loaded as the setting data In addition if setting data in which the extension was changed is loaded the system may not work properly later Depending on the settings saving may fail due to insufficient USB memory capacity If saving fails and the error mes
221. lowing tables to prepare the lens and extension tube The lens may vary depending on the size of measurement objects and the camera setting distance i Optical Diagrams 0 3 megapixel digital camera stand alone FZ S O 10000 3Z4S LEML 10035 3Z4S LEML 7527 3Z4S LEML 5018 3Z4S LEML 3519 1000 Camera placement distance mm 100 3Z4S LEML 2514 3Z4S LEML 1614 3Z4S LEML 1214 3Z4S LEML 0813 3Z4S LEML 0614 30 FZ3 User s Manual 10 100 Y view mm 1000 About Lenses 303 sexipueddy 2 megapixel digital camera stand alone FZ S O 2M FZ LEH100 FZ LEH75 FZ LEHSO FZ LEH35 Ar N 2 a aS P P E z Goh to Se CD ae 4G GS Ss lg a6 tota WW CP 42777 NN NN N So E m ee CE i a 0 ee ee I4 o O N NCN v i ER hoe CRM T2 T T DD quU IN LU Lu wu NIH NARA AA ASSIA PTT TT WAR TT NNNNNNNN dll NN x f A LZ 4 pes A 2 Pa d T A a TZ a LI a i 1 K i i j Wi A P P y a 5 cs oo ig a a a i TT SEANNNNONNNNC NS SS AN ee ELE ee T SNARE SN TT TO Ji ANAS LAT SOY Ww ey DIEI a T EL n A Ace m Mm DL 1 Lr Ct 2 ie LIE Le tuer e e e o ww eouejsip jueujeoe d eJaulE AW FZ
222. ment Set Get bd Juag 1 OFF 0 Data Matrix ECC 200 120 Code type Set Get t QRcode T EI MU 0 are considered to be wild cards 121 l J p Set Get 1 are considered to be character judgement strings ERON una d sei 0 are considered to be wild cards 122 M PAM p Set Get 1 are considered to be character classification strings 123 Flag showing character string display Set Get 0 Not displayed results 1 Displayed 0 Black 1 White 124 Character string display color Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 125 Character string display size Set Get 10 to 200 0 Black code 134 Code color setting Set Get 1 White code 170 Upper limit of number of characters Set Get 0 to CHAR NUM MAX detected FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 279 Se qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 x3 5 So qe eouoeJ9Jos JeuJ9 X3 o 171 Lower limit of number of characters Set Get 0 to CHAR NUM MAX detected 172 Judgement comparison character string Set Get Comparison string used for judgement 173 Lower limit of overall quality Set Get 0 to 4 Lo ee 0 Not displayed 190 Grade overall quality display Set Get 1 Displayed Grade Contrast display setting 0 Not displayed n DataMatrix QR ooo 1 Displayed Grade Modulation display setting 0 Not displayed is DataMatrix QR Sores 1 Displayed Grade Fixed pattern damage display 0 Not displayed n setting DataMatrix QR PEU 1 Displayed Grade Decode display setting 0 Not displayed Ius DataMatrix QR
223. mmand area Command Description top channel code 2 1000 3 0040 Set command codes 4 5 Specifies the unit No 6 Specifies data number in the External Reference ae Tables Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel imd nes 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Conmandesde 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Value multiplied by 1000 P I E e FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 169 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Acquiring Date and Time Acquires the date and time from the internal calendar timer in the controller Command PLC to controller Command area Command zi Description top channel code 19 12 11 8 3 0 2 2000 0010 0000 0000 0000 ten 3 0040 0000 0000 0100 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit aco Description top channel ifs Command code 3 Store response target command codes 4 Response code Command execution result 5 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF e 7 0000 0000 Year data 1900 to 2100 9 0000 0000 Month data 1 to 12 11 0000 0000 Date data 1 to 31 13 0000 0000 Hour data O to 23 15 0000 0000 Minute data 0 to 59 17 000
224. n Serial RS 232C 422 The Serial window is displayed 2 Tap Setting to set communication specifications Dorf i ruat ipn Mode Horma Interface Baud rate bee Dala lenggih bit Pariky Stop bit bit Flow contral Deiiaiter Timeout s FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 183 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOU 9 Setting value Factory default Interface SA jode Adjust to the PC communication specifications 2400 4800 9600 19200 Adjust to the PC communication specifications 38400 57600 115200 Item Description Band rate bps Note 1 Data length bit Parity Adjust to the PC communication specifications Stop bit bit Flow control is not performed with software If the time in which there is no response from external devices reaches the timeout setting time a timeout error occurs and an Elcuraontrd error message is displayed in the window The parallel interface ERROR signal also turns on Xon Xoff Flow control is performed with software Data is sent according to the Xon Xoff codes from external devices CR Delimiter LF Adjust to the PC communication specifications CR tLF 1 to 120 m Timeout s Set the time in which a timeout error will occur in seconds
225. n the processing time may be longer or fluctuate Be sure to check it thoroughly before starting an operation When image logging or data logging is executed for a network drive the communication may be disrupted and the logging process may not be executed successfully due to the controller measurement load that becomes too heavy when the multiple image input function is used In this case set a reasonable amount of measurement takt time Reference About loading data to a PC Factory settings are set so that logging data is saved in the controller RAMDisk When logging data is loaded to a PC set USBDisk as the save destination Logging data is first saved to the controller RAMDisk and then can be copied from the RAMDisk and saved to the USBDisk using Copy files in Save to file Folder name USBDisk 7 Tap OK Folder name WRAD i sk Help DK Cancel Settings are confirmed and the Logging Setting window closes FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 101 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg v uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o ESSS 1 Logging images saved in the controller memory are overwritten starting with the oldest image if the upper limit for the number of save images is exceeded Reference amp About Number of Logging Images p 346 The data saved in the controller memory or RAMDisk is deleted when the controller is restarted Re
226. n Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 159 Upper limit of evaluation Set Get 0 to 100 160 Lower limit of evaluation Set Get 0 to 100 161 Upper limit of count Set Get 0 to 256 162 Lower limit of count Set Get 0 to 256 165 Upper limit of radius Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 166 Lower limit of radius Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 171 Search type Set Get s sauna n 0 X ascending 1 X descending 2 Y ascending 173 Sort condition Set Get Eco 5 Eva descending 6 Radius ascending 7 Radius descending eta an 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 i i E 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 n 254 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 1003 Nx4 N 0 to 255 Radius Get only 0 to 99999 9999 Shape Search 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Correlation value Get only 0 to 100 6 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 12 Detected coordinate X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 Detected coordinate Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 T Magnification X of search results designated 15 Magnification X Get only by Search No ENT Magnification Y of search results designated 16 Magnification Y Get only by Search No Correlation value of search results 17 Correlation value array Get only designated by Label No for external reference 18 postion x ananceme
227. n step 4 3 Set the logging images save destination E fel inal ion Save bo sensory O Save lo menory Pile Folder nama cio Profi 5 E Reference In order to perform fast logging image files are first saved in the controller memory Note however that the controller memory for saving images is a ring memory If the maximum number of save images is reached images will be overwritten starting with the oldest saved image if further images are saved Reference amp About Number of Logging Images p 346 The controller memory is cleared if the power is turned off again To keep images select Save to memory file and save images to USB memory etc Setting value M D Setting item acer leri escription Save to memory Saves to the controller memory Destination Images saved to the controller memory are saved to a Save to memory file USBDisk or RAMDisk as files When Save to memory file in Destination is selected set the destination and file names Setting value setting item Factory default Description Specify the image file save destination RAMDisk or USB memory Logging images are saved in the specified save destination folder Folder name a ceo USBDisk Sets the prefix for the save file name Prefix The set character string is added at the beginning of the name of the save file Switch If checked folders that correspond to scene numbers are Checked
228. nce Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link p 157 Processing item Standard processing item o to Sophisticated processing item processing item having at the end of the item name Useful processing items when setting up camera Reference b Processing Item List Manual Focus p 397 Reference b Processing Item List Manual Iris p 400 22 Checking System Configuration FZ3 User s Manual Preparing Controllers and Cameras Preparing Controllers No special preparation is required with this product as processing items are pre installed Please check that the controller is switched on and that the Main screen is displayed For details see the User s Manual The first time the program is started up the Language Setting window is displayed so select the language Reference Selecting the Language Language Setting p 131 Adjusting Cameras Confirm what kind of images are being taken Adjust the position of measurement objects and the focus of the lens 1 Tap of Image mode in Image display of the Main screen Control area and select Through The through images captured from the camera are viewed in the Image Display area Reference Changing Display Contents p 83 Note The same operation is available by tapping View Image mode Through 2 Adjust the position of measurement objects so that they display at the center of the monitor Adju
229. nd Item Description Execute Command Line No inf ii Input example DI7 DI6 DI5 D14 yo iw DI3 to 0 The controller l Measure Continuously measure does not see Continuous continuously an line 1 M this signal measurement during input of Input example so a setting commands 10010000 of either O or 1 makes no difference Input Scene Switch line 0 to Scene Switch n Scene No in 2 l measurement 01 l switch CERES binary Input example format 10100010 Input Scene Switch line 1 to Scene Scene grou SIMI oe Group No Group 2 switch ulii MEA EMEN B da ed in bor In FAM le scene groups line number A i y na pie to send ONAN bad commands Clear the measurement to Clearing measurement values Measurement vaus 10 of line 1 The OR signal Values Input and DO signal example 11010000 are not cleared Clear error output Clear the error of line O Clear Error The ERROR 10 0001 Input example indicator is also 11010001 cleared Clear Clear the OR wees ie 1 Parallel signal and DO 1 10 0010 Input aire OR DO signal 11010010 0 OFF 1 ON Reference When the input command is not received correctly the ERROR signal turns on When parallel continuous measurement is engaged and continuous STEP signal is input switching of scene group should be avoided When this is performed set Unchecked in Save scene group on switch scene in either of the settings items below Swi
230. nd code 2000 0050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Bit 15 12 11 8 7 4 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0101 Description 0000 0000 Set command codes 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Controller to PLC Year data 1900 to 2100 0000 Month data 1 to 12 Date data 1 to 31 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Hour data 0 to 23 Minute data O to 59 Second data 0 to 59 Response aee Description top channel us Command code 3 Store response target command codes 4 Response code Command execution result 5 OK 0 0000 0000 Changes settings related to image logging Changes settings related to image logging Command PLC to controller Command area top channel 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bi 15 12 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 EM e 0101 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Description Sets command codes Specifies Identifier 0 Identifier 1 and Setting value Identifier 0 Specifies logging Identifier 1 Specifies the name of the item to be set Refer to identifier 1 of non procedure command SYSDATA Setting value Specifies the setting value FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 173 seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo
231. ne Group 0 rh Gm Uum GE GE GR SS SS a un Controller Scene group 0 To be saved into built in flash memory scaena group 1 ta 31 To be saved into USB memory Eom Note The maximum number of scenes that can be used is 1024 32 scenes are handled as 1 scene group and up to 32 scene groups can be set In other words 32 scenes x 32 scene groups 1 024 scenes which is the maximum number that can be used There are multiple USB ports on the controller but it is necessary to assign the drive name USBDisk to the USB memory in which the scene group data being used is stored When other USB memory devices are already inserted perform this operation after removing all USB memory devices other than the one in which the scene group data is stored If the USB memory capacity is insufficient for the data size it is possible that the number of scenes can be set is lower than 1 024 The scene data size varies depending on the contents of settings The data size that can be set available data memory can be checked in the system menu Reference amp Checking System Information System Information p 145 46 What Is a Scene Group FZ3 User s Manual Creating a Scene This section explains methods for adding a new processing unit to a scene 1 Display the scene to edit on the Main screen Reference Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 65 2 Tap Edit flow in Toolbar Edit flow Datasave
232. ng the RUN Window to Fast View Mode Select RUN mode p 88 Method for setting display contents of RUN window Reference amp Setting the RUN Window Display RUN Mode View Setting p 138 T4 ADJUST Window and RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual Normal Mode RUN Window To display measuring a time and D Scene 0 overall judgment results of total Scene Scene group 0 To display HG unit in rad Ach em rmage Image matar i To cascade measured To display measured Display method of the Switches t Switches to the results in camera image X results in text format image can be changed Simplified non stop ADJUST window adjustment moda When processing is taking a long time it is necessary to check processing items and setting values The time required for measurement is also displayed with the measurement results so use this for reference Fast View Mode RUN Window Simplifies display items and makes the display speed faster RUN E Scene group Scene L i g 4 FZ3 User s Manual ADJUST Window and RUN Window 15 uoneJedo Bunjejg 1ueujaunseeyv s Burwood uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o owitching to the RUN Window 1 Tap Switch to RUN mode in the ADJUST window Some Vim Mesure Data Greim Hein ADJUST nsn M Cerere risa Tabs I ran Window switches to the RUN window Note You can make settings so that
233. ng unit No 0 to 9999 No External Varies depending on the specified processing unit processing items For details see the reference table External Reference Table of the processing items registered in the processing unit No Reference External Reference Tables p 244 Setting data Set the settings data parameters Example When Skipping angle external reference table value 124 in Search set as the 6th processing unit processing unit number 5 is changed to 10 lt Command gt IUJN 1 TIJDJAJTJA 5 1712 4 1110 r Response OKER Example When Verification string external reference table value 139 in Character Inspection set as the 6th processing unit processing unit number 5 is changed to ABC lt Command gt UJN TITIDIAITJAL 5 1139 AIBICIUs lt Response gt OJK R VERGET Acquires the controller version information lt Command format gt VIEIRIGI EIT e 210 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Response format When processing is performed normally Version information Je t Date Month i Year When processing is not performed normally EJRIr lt Parameters explanation gt Type of controller Version information Software version Example When the controller type is FZ3 XXX the software version is 2 00 and the date is Sept 25th 2008
234. nge 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Scroll X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 6 Scroll Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Scrollo Get only 999 9999 to 999 9999 8 Position X Get only 0 to 99999 9999 9 Position Y Get only 0 to 99999 9999 10 Measurement 0 Get only 360 to 360 11 Reference X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 12 Reference Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 Reference 0 Get only 999 9999 to 999 9999 120 Interpolation Set Get M bis 1 Bilinear 0 1 unit scroll 1 2 unit scroll 121 Method Set Get i 2 Expression 3 Reset scroll 122 Scroll target Set Get pe camlele as 1 Prev unit image l 0 OFF 123 With rotation Set Get 1 ON Trapezoidal Correction No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120 Interpolation mode Set Get a RONG l l Linear interpolation 1 124 Method 0 See unit 4 1 Expression 0 Camera image 122 Input image 1 Prev image 123 Reference position setting Set Get 0 Figure method 1 Expression 124 Measurement position setting Set Get 0 Figure method 1 Expression 125 Reference coordinate display Set Get Y hs ISP AGE 1 Displayed 282 Compensate image FZ3 User s Manual 0 Black l 1 White 126 Reference coordinate display Set Get 2 Red color 3 Green 4 Blue 127 Measurement coordinate Set Get 0
235. nitialized status The camera connected is not the same as the one used for the last save Please check Cannot read selected file Confirm selected file once again The communication time out is occurred ERR The cause of the failure to switch or to save when switching may be that the USBDisk was removed from the controller Set a USBDisk to the controller and try again Confirm that a USBDisk is set to the controller and try again The following causes are suspected The power may have been cut off during the last data save Because the operation mode was switched the required memory size may have increased and memory became insufficient Check if the camera is connected correctly This message is displayed when the system and the scene group 0 data edited using the simulation software are loaded and the unit is restarted Save the setting to the controller and then restart Check the following points Have you removed the USBDisk from the controller after selecting files on the USBDisk Have you deleted the selected file Such as the case when you selected a file on the RAMDisk and the file was deleted via FTP In addition the selected file may be corrupt Switch off controller verify the following contents and then restart Is cable connected correctly Does it comply with communication specifications of external devices Are external devices functioning normally If error is not resolved after confirmation
236. nn hehe hhuuuusus ihr rhesssssh auus sunu uaa nenne 316 Color Processing Mechanism meme 316 Search Processing Mechanism Hem 316 Edge Detection Measurement Hee 320 Defect Detection Measurement nennen enhn hhhhhh nnne nna h anao 322 Handling Coordinates s Henne 323 Terminology Explanations mH 325 Basic Knowledge about Operations Hn 329 Inputting Values mmm 329 Inputting Text semen 329 Selecting Files and Folders Henn 330 FZ3 User s Manual 5 Available Operations in Select File Window ee IM ee CR CE RR ECR A M RM RUN RUN Rea ECR en CA Gee ee ee ee Ru CR M RN m cm 332 Using the Zoom Function ttt ttre eee eee 21eeeeeeeSeeeemmmm IIRIRHSBHMHeeenemnmmHmHHHHeeeSeIe 333 Setting Figures n C 335 Layout of Figure Setting Area mm hh hh hh hh hern 335 Setting Methods e K MMeenmHeMemmnmenBBMM MMMHMHe4e I I K HIHIHHMHMMHHMHHHIHSHeHHHMHHHMHHHeHhhme 336 About OR Setting NOT Setting B 344 About Number of Logging Images BL 346 About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used 00688 347 About Max Number of Loading Images during Multiple Image Input 088n8 349 Character Code Table eeeHeeeMHMeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee e eeeeeee eeeeeee ele 350 Upper Limits of Processing Item Parameters egg ee eeee ee eeee eens eee eee e eens ease enna 351 About Memories Usable with FZ Series eBBB g B1 eeee eeee ee 2 c2 2eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 352 Memory Display Image on PLC O eeSe9eH
237. nnection cannot be established if the network drives are not ready when the controller is started If there is no access to a network drive for a certain amount of time the connection will be automatically cut off depending on the network drive setting of the connection target Make sure that the setting on the connection target is not set to automatic disconnection Date and time of the update of the file created at network logging If the time zone of the external device is different from the time zone setting of the controller GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Do not automatically adjust clock for Daylight Saving Time the date and time actually written may be different from the date and time of the file update Adjust the time zone of the external device to match that of the controller s Checking System Information System Information The controller model and measurement application version can be checked You can check the USB memory status with FZ3 9 9 9 H9 P series only Reference How to Use USB Memory p 123 1 On the Main screen tap Other menu System information The System Information window is displayed 2 Check the information The controller model and measurement application version can be checked Model FIk HEXX Sollware Version ver P00 Z5 EJAS 25 HeBoFy slale Clade 3 Tap Memory state The following information can be checked Available application memory The application memory is t
238. nnel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Commandeod 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 scene Group Switching Switches the scene group number to be used Command PLC to controller Command area Command top channel code 19 12 11 8 2 2000 3 0030 168 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link NG 1 FFFF FFFF Bit 7 4 3 0 Description 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 Set command codes FZ3 User s Manual tA 0000 0000 0000 0000 Specifies the scene group 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 No Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0010 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Acquiring Unit Data Acquires the specified processing unit data In processing unit data setting acquisition external reference table No 139 verification string of Character Inspection external reference table No 164 judgement comparison character string of barcodes and external reference table No 172 judgement comparison character string of 2D Codes cannot be used Command PLC to controller Co
239. nnneeaneenaneeeeeeeeettseneeeennneaeeaaaaasaansserersnntions 291 Get Unit Daenen a o a a A 291 Set Unit Figure Hmmm 291 Get Unit Figure meme 291 Trend Monitor rrr nre enn EE EA haha ahhh RAEE EEEE E nnne 292 Image Logging semen 293 Data Logging m eee 293 Elapsed Time meme 294 LEnE 294 FOCUS SEIL ie a A R A E E TOE 294 HE aer E E a aea a R 294 Branche D E A E E E a 296 Conditional Branch Aennean eE N E E EEE ES e E EEE EEEE 296 DI Branch eisai aa e a a aa Ea 296 Output result mmm 297 Data Output eee 297 Parallel Data Output mme 297 Parallel Judgement Output meme 298 Fieldbus Data Output mmm 299 Display result Henne meme 300 Result Display Henne 300 Display Image File s mmm 300 Display Last NG Image certs mme 300 9 Appendixes ee QR CR Edda E RENAL VERE QR e a x aV QOL ROUES RACE AUR UR CERE ER Ue M Ru ree caca ost d dca c ee 302 About LEnSes LLLI SEoSo EE0EE0E 0E0EESSSonnRnRnn 303 Error Messages and Troubleshooting ccrrrttrttttttttertrrt etter teeter eeereneeerereeeee ene etees 309 FAQ v 313 During Start Up emen Henne 313 During Operation mme menm 313 For Measurement 2 cet ihan e ea aa a R 314 About Parallel Interface rrr a aaa aen aaka a En 315 About Serial Interface RS 232C 422 Connection treet titre eeeeeeeeeeees 315 Measurement Mechanism nnne rena n
240. nology Explanations FZ3 User s Manual Scene group 32 units are incorporated into a scene for sorted measurement This is convenient for managing scenes on a per category basis Reference What Is a Scene Group p 46 Center of gravity The images with white pixels are cut into paper of a certain thickness and when one point is used to support the paper the point which enables the paper to balance is called the center of gravity The center of gravity of a circular object is the center of the circle the center of gravity of a rectangle is the intersection of two diagonal lines Processing item Single units that constitute measurement processing Scenes measurement flow are created by registering processing items in units Processing unit A unit that constitutes measurement processing Scenes measurement flow are created by setting processing items in processing units Reference Creating a Scene p 47 Correlation value 0 to 100 are used to represent the degree of similarity with an acceptable object Namely higher values indicate higher degrees of similarity Flow control If the processing speed of the receiving side is slower than that of the sending side when data is being transferred the receiving side will send interruption commands to the sending side or send re admittance commands and then adjust the transmission speed Send sida 2d Cais LLL LL send date buffar t amp waidai msufficiand proce
241. normally Scene Mo max 2 digits Parameters explanation Scene No The acquired scene No currently used scene No is output as a response 0 to 31 Example When scene 0 is being used Command SICIEINIE r FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 197 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw BuljedluNWWO pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey lt Response gt Scene switch No Switches the scene No to be used lt Command format gt scene No max 2 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OJKISR When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Scene No Specifies the scene No after switching 0 to 31 Example When switching to scene 2 lt Command gt lt Response gt OJK 9s SCNGROUP or SG Acquires scene group No Acquires the current scene group No 198 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Command format s c NGIRIOu P SIGIR Response format When processing is performed normally Scene group No max 2 digits When processing is not performed normally EIRIe lt Parameters explanation gt Scene group No The acquired scene group No currently used scene group No is output as a response 0 to 31 Example When scene grou
242. nspection External Reference 275 300 Circle 338 DNS server 154 182 242 Circle Regression External Reference 290 Circle Angle External Reference 280 E Circumference 339 EC Circle Search External Reference 253 Classification External Reference 257 ECM Search External Reference 252 Clear measurement 104 Edge detection 320 Clearing saved images 104 Edge Pitch External Reference 259 CLRMEAS 189 Edge level 320 Color Data External Reference 262 Edge Position External Reference 258 Color Gray Filter External Reference 284 Elapsed Time External Reference 294 Color processing 316 Ellipse 338 Command Control PLC Link 163 Encoder trigger setting 139 Command format EtherNet IP 219 Ethernet 152 179 Command format Non procedure 185 EtherNet IP 214 Communication specifications Ethernet Non Extension tube 307 procedure 179 External Reference tables 244 Extract Color Filter External Reference 285 FZ3 User s Manual 357 358 Fan control setting 132 Fast view mode 75 Figure setting 335 Fieldbus Data Output External Reference 299 Filtering External Reference 283 Fine Matching External Reference 274 Flash memory 116 Flexible Search External Reference 249 Flow control Terminology Explanation 327 Focus External Reference 294 FTP 241 Get Unit Data External Reference 291 Get Unit Figure External Reference 291 Gravity and Area External Reference 263 Gravity center Terminology Explanation 327 Halation
243. nt tony Position X of search results designated by Label No for external reference 49 Position amangement Get only Position Y of search results designated by Label No for external reference Measure angle of search results designated 20 Measure angle arrangement Get only by Label No for external reference e Magnification X of search results designated 21 Magnification X arrangement Get only by Search Na for extermalreierenee v Magnification Y of search results designated 22 Magnification Y arrangement Get only by o earch No fanc Oma rer erence 101 Output Coordinates Set Get ATEO 1 Before scroll VES 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get t ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get IOD dus 1 OFF 120 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 121 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 0 OFF 1 XY 130 Scaling Set Get 2 X 3 Y FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 255 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eoua8J9Jos JeuJo x3 o 131 Upper limit of the scale Set Get 100 to 110 132 Lower limit of the scale Set Get 90 to 100 140 Reverse Set Get A ed 150 Detection point X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 151 Detection point Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 152 Reference X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 153 Reference Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 160 Candidate Point Level Set Get O to 100 161 Label No Set Get 0 to 99 162 Label No for external reference Set G
244. number or 0 When 1 Negative number The advantage of two s complement numbers is that positive and negative numbers can be used as is in calculations Example When 1 10 9 11111111 8 1 300001010 7 10 OOOO 9j 328 Terminology Explanations FZ3 User s Manual Inputtin This section describes how to input values required for setting the judgement conditions and communication specifications Methods for setting up values include the following depending on the settings Specify values directly with the numeric keyboard This is used for input of specific values Setnumerical values by dragging the slider Setting values can be done by dragging the slider on the screen The method for displaying the numeric keyboard and setting values is explained here For other methods refer to individual setting descriptions 1 Tap in the item in which a value is to be set p The numeric keyboard is displayed 2 Tap the numeric keys to input values The numerical value is input 3 Tap OK This verifies the value and closes the numeric keyboard Inputting Text This section describes methods for inputting file names and descriptive text FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Operations 329 sexipueddy sexipueddy E The following software keyboard is displayed in the window for inputting text a Japanese Input Mode Japanese is input using kana input To toggle between uppercase and lowerc
245. nuuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouje A Setting value Factory default Setting item Description Address setting Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 10 5 5 100 0 0 0 0 to Subnet mask 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 1 to Default gateway 255 255 255 254 10 5 5 110 a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 10 5 5 1 IP address DNS server I O setting Input mode Normal Input format ASCII a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 Output IP address So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOU 9 0 to 65535 I O port No 9600 3 Tap OK Set the IP address of the controller When Obtain an IP address automatically is selected the IP address of the controller will be automatically obtained When Use the following IP address is selected set the IP address subnet mask and the default gateway address Input the controller IP address Input the subnet mask address Input the default gateway address Input the DNS server address This item cannot be changed This item cannot be changed Input the output destination IP address Set the port No to use for data I O with the controller When PLC link or UDP communication is used in addition to FTP specify the I O port number to be u
246. ommunication Specifications Parallel Interface rrstrrrtrrreee tet eee tet t eter et ene eees 221 Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface qusussassasssausussuanuaAmuanuunuausussmasuauuasuauasuuaunuas 223 I O Format Parallel Interface T 224 Timing Chart 0n LC 228 Externally Outputting Data through Te De 241 Setting Communication Specifications murtrususuhusususurusuerusesssesssrsussusuesueususensensseessessuensuens 241 Communication Example T0000 243 8 External Reference Tables cccccccccc ccc nan neer nner nines 244 Input image 0 0 0 0 w 247 Measurement Image Switching B 247 Measurement e e e mH M III III 248 Search n 248 Flexible Search n 249 Sensitive Search Tn 250 ECM Search 0n 0L LC 252 EC Circle Search n 253 Shape Search Henne 255 Classification n L LG Q 257 Edge POSITION mmm MISI 258 Edge Pitch m n HMM HIIS 259 Scan Edge POSITION e HMM MI MIIMHSHSeerrr 260 Scan Edge Width eee 8832 2 HeSHHHHeeeeHemnmHmHeHeeHnmHHHHHHeenemeeHnB 261 Color Data e II 3h Sh Ih ehh 262 Gravity and Area sse m MI III een 263 Labeling nw 265 Label Data n n MM eeee e leeeeeeeeeeee e e 2 3eeeeeeeemmIMHSHHmHhHeeHenh 267 Labeling TB 268 Defect n 272 Precise Defect n 273 Fine Matching 0n LL ee 274 Character Inspection La 275 Date Verification Tw 276 Model Dictionary Tw 277 Barcode III 3
247. on flow j uoneJedo eJojeg 10 bea Preparation Test Analysis Measurement Operation d Analyzing Operation Flow Utilizing ME A Hefore starting it is necessary to take measurements and make adjustments of the cameras j b Setting Scenes Measurement Flow Nu a o A z e om E S Creates adits a measurement flow b Performing Test Measurement Starting Operation f Perfort 8 test measurement and adiust the parameters for the processing items ge Switch to the RUN window and check to see if there is a problem P Saving Loading Data f k Using NG analyser ane ee oe oe ee mu um ed remm measurement in the RUN window eem the System Environment J SS Saye th tte data sand images Or analyze the data 2 P Methods for Connecting and Communicating with External Devices E F Using NG analyser 5 FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows Screens vary with the status of the operation being performed The structure of some typical screens and the functions for the various buttons are described here Main screen ADJUST window m a A screen for confirming measurement status and for performing adjustment When the power is first turned on the Main screen RUN window a UH m This is the window for a
248. on mode Set Get B ecd i vu 141 Edge level absolute value Set Get 0 to 442 142 Edge level specification method Set Get 0 9o 1 Absolute value 143 Clockwise Counterclockwise Set Get 0 Clockwise 1 Counterclockwise 144 Measure type Set Get 0 Projection 1 Derivation 258 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Edge Pitch 0 No judgement unmeasured Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG N o Average width Get only 0 to 99999 9999 0 Max width Get only 0 to 99999 9999 1 Min width Get only O to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get DUAE sco 1 Before scroll qd o0 Oo CO FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 259 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJ9 Xx3 5 scan Edge Position Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 14 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 15 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 16 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 a ibrati 0 OFF 1 OFF a ON 0 Color IN 136 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 260 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 137 Lower limit of the maximum edge position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of the maximum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of the maximum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Upper limit of the minimum edge position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 141 Lower limit of the minimum edge position X
249. only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 15 Point Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 16 Distance Get only 0 0000 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get Donic Sero 1 Before scroll 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 0 Calculate line Calculate cross point and angle of two lines Calculate distance between line and point 1 2 121 Noise cancel 0 Set Get 0 Noise cancel OFF 1 Noise cancel ON Noise cancel ON 123 Number of points O Set Get 2to8 124 Number of points 1 Set Get 2to8 125 Method 0 0 Nearest unit 1 Expression 120 Function type Set Get 0 Nearest unit 126 Method 1 1 Expression Circle Regression No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Central X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Central Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Get only 0 to 99999 9999 7 101 Output Coordinates Set Get pel Scien 1 Before scroll ibrati 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 1 ON 121 Number of points Set Get 3 to 8 122 Method Set Get 0 Nearest unit 1 Expression Calibration No Data name Set Get Data range prat 0 Specified point 120 Coordinate indication method Set Get 1 Sampling 200 to 208 Specified coordinate X Set Get 0 0000 to 99999 9999 300 to 308 Specified coordinate Y Set Get 0 0000 to 99999 9999 290 Support measurement FZ3 User s Manual 400 to 408 Actual coordinate X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999
250. onnection setting Although an error message such as the following is not displayed the ERROR signal and the ERR indicator will turn ON Cause Remedy Input the STEP signal after the READY signal turns ON Check to make sure that no chattering has occurred in the The STEP signal was input when the READY STEP signal signal was turned OFF Noise is superimposed onto the STEP signal Keep PLC and FZ3 away from the noise source ids Please enter a correct parallel command A non existing parallel command was entered The parallel scene group switch command was executed when no USB memory was Switch the scene group with the USB memory installed installed FZ3 L35 H FZ3 39 O FZ3 7 M only sexipueddy E 312 Error Messages and Troubleshooting FZ3 User s Manual FAQ During Start up POWER LCD is not lit Is the power supply connected correctly Is the supply voltage low 24 V DC 10 15 Nothing is displayed on the monitor Is the monitor ON Is the monitor cable connected correctly Has the monitor failed Is the power capacity enough LCD monitor Have you turned off the LCD If you have the monitor recovery will occur if you tap on the bottom of the monitor Monitor images are disordered Are the power supply and cable generating electronic noise Is the monitor cable connected correctly Input cannot be made Are the cables for input devices mouse etc connected correctly Is the angle
251. or brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 0 Black 1 White 168 Nx 10 Background color N Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 0 OFF 1 Area 2 Gravity X 3 Gravity Y 4 Elliptic major axis 501 N x 10 Extraction condition N Set Get 5 Elliptic minor axis 6 Ratio for flat approximate ellipse T Width of circumscribed rectangle 8 Height of circumscribed rectangle 9 Rectangle X1 503 N x 10 Extraction condition upper limit N Set Get 504 N x 10 Extraction condition lower limit N Set Get 266 Measurement 10 Rectangle Y1 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual 600 N x 10 Judgement condition N Set Get OFF Number of labels Total area Area Gravity X Gravity Y Elliptic axis angle Elliptic major axis Elliptic minor axis 9 Ratio for flat approximate ellipse 10 Width of circumscribed rectangle 11 Height of circumscribed rectangle 12 Upper left X coordinate of circumscribed ONoOnNRWNM AO rectangle 13 Upper left Y coordinate of circumscribed rectangle T l 0 OR 601 Nx 10 Judgement condition display flag N Set Get 1 NOT 602 N x 10 Judgement condition upper limit N Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 603 N x 10 Judgement condition lower limit N Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label Data NO Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK
252. or extraction image Post combination image Post conversion image Measurement image Last NG 1 Previous NG error image Displayed when there are 2 or more saved images Display Last NG Image Otherwise Last NG is displayed 2 NG error image from 2 previous Displayed when there are 3 or more saved images Otherwise Last NG is displayed 3 NG error image from 3 previous Displayed when there are 4 or more saved images Otherwise Last NG is displayed Arranging the RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual Enlarging Measurement Images Zoom Images Set the measurement image zoom status magnification and display position During display of multiple images magnification can be set for each image 1 On the Main screen tap View Zoom images A magnification setting tab is displayed in the top right of the measurement image 2 Setthe magnification as required Set value Setting item Factory default Description Measurement image magnification setting Sets magnification 3 Drag images to specify the display position as required 4 On the Main screen tap View Zoom images The current magnification and display position are saved Displaying Flow and Detailed Results owitches display of Flow and Detail result on off of in the Control area Note he same operation is available by tapping View Flow or Detail result 1 Tap Flow or Detail result in the Control
253. ormat When processing is performed normally When processing is not performed normally Parameters explanation Display 0 Changes the image modes of all the windows to Through image mode 1 Changes the image modes of all the windows to Freeze NO 2 Changes the image modes of all the windows to Last NG FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 193 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Example When changing the current image mode to Last NG lt Command gt DI SIPICIOINID 2 98 lt Response gt IMGSAVE Saves image data lt Command format gt i L Save destination Image data No max 3 digits Response format When processing is performed normally O K lt R When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Specifies the No of the image data to be saved 0 to max number of logging images MAX Image data The maximum number of logging images can be a number with a maximum of 3 digits The number No of images will vary depending on the controller used and the camera connected Reference amp About Number of Logging Images p 346 Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path ex USBDisk abc IFZ Save Save destinations include directories under th
254. ortest takt time refers to the shortest time over which a STEP can be accepted without generating a pool of captured images Reference Single line High speed Mode p 34 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 239 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey mportant 9 Set the image mode to Freeze When loading images continuously at high speed the number of images that can be loaded is limited Once the maximum number of images have been loaded the READY signal will not turn on until the current measurement processing is complete Accordingly the next STEP cannot be input Reference About Max Number of Loading Images during Multiple Image Input p 349 If STEP is input while READY is off the ERROR terminal turns on If triggers are input continuously and too quickly for the communication output to catch up some steps may not be output or measurement delays may occur Input triggers at appropriate timings that do not cause communication delays The multiple image input function cannot be used in the following cases Multiple camera input processing units are present in the flow An Camera Image Input HDR is present in the flow 1 camera input processing unit is used in multiple processes using the branching function Measurement triggers are input other
255. ory settings capture images are saved to the RAMDisk The save destination can be changed Item Description File format The file format is BMP The file name is the date and time at which capture was performed YYYY MM DD_HH MM SS MS BMP Year 4 digits Month Date_ Hour Minute Second Millisecond Example The file name for a capture date and time of 3 10 2007 11 25 30 500 2007 03 10 11 25 30 500 BMP File name Note The following windows cannot be captured The window to select a file or a folder Confirmation message window when LCD is turned off FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 105 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg v uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o Setting the Save Destination for Captured Images Sets the save destination for the image captured with the screen capture function 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Screen capture Screen capture setting The Screen Capture Setting window is displayed 2 Specify the save destination for captured images Save foldar CUSED i sk 3 Tap OK The settings are determined and the Screen Capture Setting window closes 106 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Using Tool This section describes adjustments during startup and convenient tools for operations i Reference Using NG Analyser p 108 FZ3 User s Manual 107 oo Buis gt Start the NG analyser by sele
256. osition Compensation relative to measurement objecti LP ion open h Pri Congerscmia 3 A Pre Malt i po iv e e D raga kamen Cio a E i Y Garry out Position Gompensation relative ta measurement object 2 5 Gheck for defects relative to gt measurement objecti2 F Cutput the judged result to an external device 44 What Is a Scene FZ3 User s Manual Example When judging type from the image and dividing later inspection conditions according to type branch processing Display Image T viis Lees pul LC lassir PCondtiona Brana e p IT Classification a Foe watering 4 End Classify measurement conditions acco ming ta the type 5 Fine Watching ele n Erud a Check for detects relative to type 2 FZ3 User s Manual What Is a Scene 45 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E A scene group refers to a grouping of 32 individual scenes Creating a scene group is convenient when increasing the number of scenes and when managing a number of scenes according to category USB memory is required for creating a scene group Scene group 0 is saved in the controller while scene groups 1 to 31 are saved in USB memory For FZ3 9 OO H9 LIL all data are saved in the controller Edit Scene Edit Scene Group Scene Group 2 Scene Group 1 Fr sce
257. ot turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When the currently used system scene group 0 data is saved as LABEL 1 BKD in the IMGO1 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned Command BIKIDISIAIVIE Y USBDisk2 Y IMGO1 LABEL1 BKD Response CLRMEAS Clears all of the measurement values of the current scene Command format Response format When processing is performed normally OIKER When processing is not performed normally E Rs FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 189 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N lt Window display status after clearing gt Judgement result Unmeasured 0 Value 0 Character string Null character DATASAVE Saves system data and scene group data to the internal flash memory in the controller lt Command format gt D JAIT A SIAIV E a Response format When processing is performed normally OIK 5a When processing is not performed normally E R a Note If DATASAVE command is executed when using scene groups 1 to 31 system data is saved on the controller s flash memory and scene group data is saved to the USB memory If there is no USB memory plugged in ER is returned Do not turn off power to the controller until
258. ow the command area response area and data output area It is different from the serial PLC link protocol used to inter connect PLCs serially Connectable Models Ethernet Interface CPU built in port Ethernet unit O CJtW EIP21 PLC link only CJ1W ETN21 U c Series name SYSMAC CJ2 CJ1H CJ1G CJ1W EIP21 PLC link only CJ1W ETN21 Built in type only CJ1W EIP21 PLC link only CJ1W ETN21 CS1W EIP21 PLC link only CS1W ETN 21 noA CP1W CIF41 SYSMAC One NSJ Built in type only NSJW ETN21 EtherNet IP tag data link communication SYSMAC CJ1 SYSMAC CS1 CSIHCSIDCS1G OIO O O UU KS ELE Z I Interface Tm YJE co CPU built in port EtherNet IP unit SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2M CJ2H Built in type only CJ1W EIP21 FZ3 User s Manual About Connecting with External Devices 149 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuiex3 uy Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey CJ1H CJ1G CJ1W EIP21 PNAC S CJ1M Built in type only CJ1W EIP21 SYSMAC_CS1 CS1H CS1D CS1G CS1W EIP21 Note When connecting to an EtherNet IP Unit the EDS file in which the FZ3 connection information has been defined needs to be installed on the tool Network Configurator Serial Interface Stiles tret SUE CPU built in port Serial communication unit ret CJ2H Ca CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 5 CJ2M Built in type only CJ1W SCU41 V1 CJ1H CJ1G CJ
259. ow for the judgement conditions of the selected processing unit is displayed If you tap the icon of the processing unit that does not have setting item of Judgement condition Judgement window is not displayed FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 93 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg v uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o 4 Change the judgement conditions of each processing unit Bsamure X 4M RES EEEE ET E 3533 3335 Bendre Tt 220 545 hsarch arp le prae 1 tam mmy J p e J Corre lal ige i i ia Tle L 5 Tap OK The Judgement window closes and the screen returns to the Main screen The changed contents are shown in the displayed scene When changing judgement conditions for multiple processing units repeat steps Reference 3 p 93 to Reference 5 p 94 6 In the Control area of the Main screen tap Quit simplified non stop adj Tool box The simplified non stop adjustment mode ends Note If Switch to ADJUST mode is tapped while entering simplified non stop adjustment the simplified non stop adjustment mode is automatically ended and the screen switches to the ADJUST window Changing Regions as a Batch Shift area Figure data for multiple processing items can be changed as a batch 1 Tap Shift area in the Edit Flow window The Move Measuring Area at Once window is displayed 94 Useful Functions for Operation F
260. p 0 is being used lt Command gt S CINIGIRIO U P s Response OKE Switch the scene group No Switches the scene group No to be used lt Command format gt Scene group No max 2 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O K fr FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 199 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey seoi eq jeuie x3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey When processing is not performed normally E RI Parameters explanation Scene group No Specifies the scene group No after switching 0 to 31 Example When switching to scene group 2 Command S CINIGIRIOJUPP 2 9s Response O K c ESSS O o l lol During parallel continuous measurement and when the STEP signal is input continuously do not perform switching of the scene group When this is performed set Unchecked in Save scene group on switch scene in either of the settings items below Switch Scene Group window Reference amp Switching Scene Groups p 65 Measure setting in the Measure menu Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 130 SCNLOAD Reads scene data Command format SIGNI DAT T TT File name of scene data Scene No max 2 digits Response format When processing is performed normally
261. per left X coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 11 Upper left Y coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 12 Perimeter 13 Circularity 14 Major axis of rotating rectangle 15 Minor axis of rotating rectangle 16 Ratio of rotating rectangle 17 Center of inscribed circle X 18 Center of inscribed circle Y 19 Center of inscribed circle XY 20 Radius of inscribed circle 21 Center of circumscribed circle X 22 Center of circumscribed circle Y 23 Center of circumscribed circle XY 24 Radius of circumscribed circle 25 Number of holes co 40 OBRWN O Row sort Column sort 507 510 512 515 Sort row column sequence 1 Set Get Judgement object label Set Get Union flag for extraction area Set Get Label number display flag Set Get Ascending Descending All Specified label OFF ON OFF ON 516 517 518 519 520 270 Feature quantity display flag Set Get Line region draw flag Set Get Sort row column sequence 2 Set Get Dynamic binary classification Set Get Extraction offset value Set Get Measurement OFF ON OFF ON Ascending Descending Light Dark Equal Not equal to 127 A E INE ee r mdr A a bore a ee eic deco E ae FZ3 User s Manual OFF Area Gravity X Gravity Y Elliptic axis angle Elliptic major axis Elliptic minor axis Ratio for flat approximate ellipse Width of circumscribed rectangle 9
262. phanumeric l dataLoggingDirectory saving data logging character Example When the image logging setting is acquired when the setting for acquiring the current image logging save condition is 1 save only for NG error Command SIYISIDIAITIAL Lloj gi d ilnjg iim alg e L o gigli ini gl Response Bs OIK 9n The current image logging save condition is 1 Only NG Changes settings related to image loggin Changes setting related to current image logging Command format SIY s DIAITIAL Loa gilla TTT Fd Setting value Identifier FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 205 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OIK n When processing is not performed normally E R R lt Parameters explanation gt Setting data Identifier 1 Set value 0 None Image Logging imageLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Folder name of image logging save Save destination folder name one byte alphanumeric destination character l l ee l l Prefix for image logging file name one byte Prefix for image logging file name imageLoggingHeader alonanumerie chatacters 0 None Data Logging dataLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Name of destination folder for Save destination folder name one byte alphanumeric
263. plays the selected area in the original size L3 Zoom out button Reduces the selected area by half laii Full screen button Enlarges the zoom browser to the entire screen and returns it to its original size Basic Knowledge about Operations FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures This section describes the setting method for objects figures and text when registering models or specifying measurement regions The type and number of objects varies depending on different setting options Layout of Figure Setting Area Window for registering figures when registering or setting areas or models as measurement objects l x cde saramaler earch ij fw Ecis ben Atle range LCD Di a Figures Displays a list of names of objects that have been set The figure at the bottom of the list is the nearest object in the foreground The higher the sequence position of the object the further back in the background it is When objects are drawn overlapping the settings for the object set last are valid b Edit Used to edit a figure The following figure editing tool is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 335 sexipueddy sexipueddy E 1 Drawing tool buttons Sets objects such as figures and text The number and type of objects available is different depending on the applicable setting ex Result display Model Region setting 2 Object editing buttons Buttons for editing objects
264. pported software version 3 30 or later Network Drive Network Drive Setting p 143 Pharmacode was added to the code types Barcode readable with Barcodes Supported software Reference Processing Items List Manual Barcodet p 267 version 3 30 or later Camera Camera image input HDR is now usable with the n i Reference Processing Items List Manual Image Input FZ3 300 700 900 series Supported software Camera Image Input HDR p 34 HDR version 3 30 or later EE a Reference b User s Manual Checking System Configuration p 20 Reference Processing Items List Manual Camera Image Input p 12 Reference b Processing Items List Manual Camera Image Input HDR Lite p 40 The intelligent compact camera FZ SQ is now supported Supported software version 3 40 or later Camera addition FZ3 User s Manual FZ3 User s Manual Before Operation FZ3 User s Manual This chapter describes the basic flow and preparations before beginning operation im Reference im Reference Reference Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference Reference Operation Flow p 10 Layouts of Screens Windows p 11 Checking System Configuration p 20 Preparing Controllers and Cameras p 23 Input Operations p 25 Returning Controller to Factory Settings p 27 Saving Settings and Turning Power Off p 28 Setting Operation Mode p 30 uoneJedo eJojeg Here describes the operati
265. ption 2 3010 0011 0000 0001 0000 Saheommana 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC gt Response Bit area Description top channel 19 12 11 8 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 ER 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF P I E e Restart Restarts the controller When a restart command is executed BUSY does not turn off even after the command execution bit turns off After a restart command is executed perform a memory clear of BUSY on the PLC side 166 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command PLC to controller Command area top channel Command Bit code 15 12 11 8 3 0 2 F010 1111 0000 0001 0000 Description Set command 3 0010 0010 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC There is no response because restarting is performed Acquiring Scene Number Acquires the current scene No Command PLC to controller Command area Command zu IDESCHD OR top channel code 15 12 11 8 CG 3 0 p 2 1000 0001 0000 0000 0000 Gsbcommand 3 0020 0000 0000 0010 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel pedo x 70 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Respons
266. r each item The soft keyboard is displayed 2 Set the name and a description Scene name and Author cannot be longer than 15 characters and Note cannot be longer than 255 characters and cannot be used alone as a Scene name Note When writing Note enter a line break after 32 single byte characters or 17 double byte characters Without a line break the display of character strings is truncated 4 Tap Close FZ3 User s Manual Editing Scenes 69 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Bues E Copying or deleting can be done by scene group and scene groups can be arbitrarily renamed Note Make sure to check that a USB memory device has been inserted before performing this operation 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 Tap Edit pemTE gM Scene 2 Scane T The Scene Group Maintenance window is displayed 3 Select the scene group to copy and tap Copy ld Sc ne gr up I5 Scena group l Scene group 1 l Scene group 10 n 12 13 14 15 16 4 Select the copy destination scene group and tap Paste The confirmation window for overwriting is displayed 5 Tap Yes The copied scene group data is written over the scene group selected as the destination 6 Tap Close 70 Editing Scene Groups FZ3 User s Manual Deleting a Scene Group Delete scene group d
267. r s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 83 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o 2 From the measurement flow tap the processing unit to be displayed FF T let HG unit ug Camera mage newt l Edge Position 2 Search 3 Set each item in Image display of the Control area Nazi NG unit F lirnage display Image layout E image Achiva nage Image naher hage oda Fre PB Posi lane C CN fe OFF Buby image maus j Item Description This item changes the camera image mode need modo ee names Image Mode List p 84 Measurement results are displayed as a list in the Image Display area Display contents are classified into Input image units such as Camera Image Input and Camera Switching and Compensate image units such as Filtering Positions and Position Compensation For example if Positions is turned on with Position Compensation selected a combined positions list for units after Position Compensation is displayed The units in the area before Position Compensation are not displayed Indicates displayable image for the selected processing item Reference List of sub image numbers p 86 Note To check detailed results for each unit when Positions is on select any unit after selecting the Detail result area to make detailed results active To make detailed results inactive s
268. r wish Measurement commands parallel non procedure PLC link and continuous measurement commands parallel only are the only communication commands that are accepted during data transfer Data transfer takes a longer time when the scene group file size is larger If the RUN window is displayed in the fast view mode non stop adjustment cannot be performed Communication settings cannot be changed on the non stop adjustment window Do not register any new camera image input unit on the non stop adjustment window If RAMDisk does not have enough free disk capacity data may not be transferred Specify an image logging destination other than RAMDisk or otherwise set applicable items to minimize the usage of RAMDisk Performing non stop adjustment changes the display mode to freeze If image logging is performed in the non stop adjustment mode data transfer may be disabled To prevent this from happening set the trigger interval longer than the logging time Setting Operation Mode FZ3 User s Manual oetting Scenes Measurement Flow FZ3 User s Manual A measurement flow consisting of a series of combined processing items is called a scene This chapter explains how to create and edit scenes im Reference im Reference i Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference im Reference What Is a Scene p 42 What Is a Scene Group p 46 Creating a Scene p 47 Processing Item Selection Guidelines p 49 E
269. ration Mode FZ3 User s Manual 3 Tap and select a desired operation mode ctor lup re timg Communication Uperkt pesraiion mode setting peralion eode High spemd logging woda x banca Tap OK On the Main screen ADJUST window tap Data save in the toolbar to save the setting data B x Er Eiin El raum xxn nose rwr h 6 On the Main screen tap System menu Controller System restart The System Restart window is displayed 7 Tap OK Rezstark system To save the change reset aller execul ing bate gave Cancel FZ3 User s Manual Setting Operation Mode 31 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg Operation Mode Selection Guidelines This section describes how to set an operation mode suitable for your specific purpose Operation made Want to shorten the toading telai AUT next can Ge use H ee E Interval of Images YILI H vH can Oe SEH a l Pl M MlM high speed mode Want to imorove the line tak Lume H Multi input Cannot be used Want to shorten the maasurament Paratle IPBralon a me per wore Too mEB high speed mode Want to improve the process taki tima PLT lie randam rtrigger made Wahl ta Messire z lines Want to modify the inspection flow gri check ME mares during operation Want re investigate the cause Norms top LI of Bach NG w
270. re detects an abnormality Please contact one of our branches or regional offices as there may be a software trouble Error Messages and Troubleshooting FZ3 User s Manual No more scene can be added due to lack of memory X Review the inspection flow and reduce the memory consumption or switch to another scene group The display varies depending on the controller The remaining capacity of the application is not sufficient for the FZ3 9 H M series Failed to paste Please check the save source or the save Beetnation The remaining data memory capacity is not sufficient for the FZ3 L35 9 30 0 7 8 0 series A camera outside the guarantee is A camera outside the guarantee is connected to the controller currently being used connected Check the following points Have you deleted the destination folder For cases where he save destination is the folder in the USBDisk is the USBDisk connected to the controller Or has the USBDisk been detected Destination folder is not found Please check PLC link cannot be established Check the following points Are the FZ communication settings correct Are the PLC communication settings correct Is cable connected correctly PLC link error Search classification and flexible search Please register higher contrast images as models Cannot perform model l i Fine matching registration For the fine matching the 2 pixels at the edge of the image cannot be register
271. re or damage FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Data Saving 117 ejye Buipeo1 Dui eg eye Buipeo1 Bui eg o oaving Settings Data to Controller Memory Saves system data and scene group data on the controller s flash memory Make sure to save settings data when settings have been changed ESSS If Save to file is performed for system scene group 0 data the data being saved will also be saved to the controller flash memory at the same time Do not turn off the power during processing The controller may not start up properly the next time it is turned on During data transfer to USB memory do not remove the USB memory device until transfer is completed Data and or the USB memory may corrupt Note When using scene groups 1 to 31 only system data can be saved in the controller flash memory Note however that if a USB memory device is plugged in scene group data can be saved to the USB memory For FZ3 9 OO H9 OLD all data are saved in the controller When Using Scene Group 0 1 On the Main screen tap Data save in the toolbar El 0 Scene group 0 0 5cene 0 Signal output OFF mes Freeze F Data save ui Scone switch Bx Edit flow Measure Switch in mihe A confirmation message is displayed Note The same operation is available by tapping Data menu Data save 2 Tap Yes System data and scene group data are saved on the controller
272. rement Images T nBL 96 Analyzing Logging Data Ct oon 102 Clearing Measurement Results eeeeMBMgMgM e 2eeeeeeeec c 3333 23eeeeeeeeeeeHHHSHeHeHeMeMeee 104 Clearing Saved Images 0L Ce 104 Capturing Screens Tw 105 4 Using Tool eee 107 Using NG Analyser Tn 108 Layouts of NG Analyser Screens LB 109 Using Method of NG Analyser T 111 5 oaving Loading Data H 115 Basic Knowledge about Data Saving LB 116 About Saving ALCQS eh hh hh hh hh hh eher 116 About USB Drive Names ee e MM HHHMH HI MIHI Inm 116 Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory 0L Ce 118 When Using Scene Group Q eM IH 118 When Using Scene Groups 1to231 Me 118 Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device Wee 120 2 FZ3 User s Manual Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device ee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 122 How to Use USB Memory FZ3 9 H9only seueudushadesuee mieseeeds doxa fexetaseseGvecececeteeweease QU EL ODD QN sees 123 Copying Moving Files HH eee 124 Loading Settings Data to Controller HH 126 6 Changing the System Environment aenta e HM 127 Setting Conditions for Camera Use HMM III 128 Checking Camera Connections Camera Connection 128 Setting Trigger Delay Inter camera Setting mn 128 Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement 8M 130 Setting the System Operation Environment HIM II H HHIIHIHIHHHHIH rr 131 Setting the Date and Time Date time Setting dh Said eae Sheree haere rp I Ald
273. rence Reference Branch Reference im Reference Output result ie Reference Reference Reference Reference Display result Reference Reference im Reference 246 Get Unit Data p 291 Set Unit Figure p 291 Get Unit Figure p 291 Trend Monitor p 292 Image Logging p 293 Data Logging p 293 Elapsed Time p 294 Wait p 294 Focus p 294 Iris p 294 Conditional Branch p 296 DI Branch p 296 Data Output p 297 Parallel Data Output p 297 Parallel Judgement Output p 298 Fieldbus Data Output p 299 Result Display p 300 Display Image File p 300 Display Last NG Image p 300 FZ3 User s Manual Judge 120 Target unit Get only Set Get 0 No judgement unmeasured 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Unit that outputs images subject to reset 0 to 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Input image 247 Se qe eoueJ9jJes euJ9 x3 5 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo x3 o Measurement Search 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Correlation value O to 100 6 Measure X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Measure Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Measure angle 180 to 180 9 Reference X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Reference Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Reference angle 180 to 180 12 Detected coordinate X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 Detected
274. rence When Output Control Is Set to None p 228 Method to output measurement results while synchronizing with Handshaking external devices Reference When Output Control Is Set to Handshaking p 232 Method to output measurement results while synchronizing with line processing timing The STEP signal is ignored the number of times set in Number of delay and measurement results are output when the STEP signal next turns on If through images are displayed however synchronization output cannot be used Reference When Output Control Is Set to Synchronization Output p 233 Output control Synchronization output Valid only when Output control is set to None Set the cycle by which measurement results are output Set the cycle so that the interval is equal to or longer than Gate ON delay Output time and shorter than measurement interval If the cycle is longer than the measurement interval output timing will be delayed while measurement is being repeated 2 0 to Output period 5000 0 ms 10 0 ms Set the time from when results are output to the parallel 1 0 to interface to when the GATE signal turns on Waiting Gate ON delay 1000 0ms _ time until data output is stable 1 0 ms Set this so that it is longer than the external device delay time Valid only when Output control is set to None or Synchronization output Set the GATE signal ON time Set the time required for external devi
275. s operation changes in brightness do not affect searching for correct positions FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 317 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Measurement for locations where there is a high degree of similarity between the shape of the model registration image and the input image is performed Since measurement is based on shape consistency profile of model positions can be measured accurately even if portions of the model PT are missing in images When the rotation angle range is wide such as full angle a search that is faster than a CR search can be performed Note however that this method may be less reliable than a CR search if the image has low contrast or blurred edges Note Basic selection flow Does Measurement l object workpiece s No rotation CR rotate no i Rotaton range of measurement objed workpiece Retation PT Rotation CR Search Speed For processing items to perform search processing such as Search and Classification you can specify the search processing speed by through the model parameter items Stab Prec and or Skipping angle If the value specified for Stab or Prec is small or if the value for Skipping angle is large the processing speed can be increased since the amount of information for the models will be decreased during the search In contrast if the values specified for Stab or Prec are large or if the value
276. s Manual The memory display image on PLC I O varies depending on the PLC to be used Using data output to the Data Output area of the PLC link from the serial data output processing item as an example this section illustrates how the memory display image varies depending on the model Data storage image Data Output area DM1000 When the PLC link Data Output area is set to DM1000 data is stored as follows in the PLC I O memory Up to 8 expressions can be registered in the serial output flow on the FZ3 side If 8 expressions are registered data is stored as follows 0 3 5 6 9 4 8 DM1000 DM1010 CX Programmer PLC I O memory display image As an example if 3 data items expression 0 DATAO 1 000 expression 1 DATA1 200 000 and expression 2 DATA2 1000 000 are output from FZ3 they are stored to the PLC Link area as measurement data as follows bNtoIO CUN END NE as Decimal number with sign 2ch separated display sexipueddy Data is stored to the PLC I O memory as follows for a decimal number per channel DM1000 a at ete FZ3 User s Manual Memory Display Image on PLC I O 353 GX Developer PLC I O memory display image As an example if 3 data items expression 0 DATAO 1 000 expression 1 DATA1 200 000 and expression 2 DATA2 1000 000 are output from FZ3 they are stored to the PLC Link area as measurement data as follows Device D1000 Mon
277. s flash memory When Using Scene Groups 1 to 31 1 Plug a USB memory device into the controller 2 On the Main screen tap Data save in the toolbar H Scene group 0 Bf Edit flow 0 Scee 0 io Signal output OFF Freeze zm Scene switch Switch to RUN mode A confirmation message is displayed 3 Tap Yes System data is saved to the controller s flash memory and scene group data is saved to the USB memory respectively The data from scene groups 1 to 31 is saved to the USBDisk For FZ3 9 OO H9 LILI all data are saved in the controller When multiple USB memories are connected to the controller check in the file explorer window 118 Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory FZ3 User s Manual etc that the USB memory where scene group data is to be saved is recognized as the USBDisk Reference About USB Drive Names p 116 Note If a USB memory device is not plugged in a check message is displayed If OK is tapped only system data is saved in the controller flash memory FZ3 User s Manual Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory 119 ejye Buipeo1 Dui eg eye Buipeo1 Bui eg o saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device Saves the setting data file to the RAM Disk or USB memory The data that can be saved is as follows Data Description System data Settings data such as the System menu settings contents which is shared within the ini controller Scene
278. s for switching scene groups and scenes can also be performed from external devices Reference Methods for Connecting and Communicating with External Devices p 148 Switching Scenes 1 Tap Scene switch in the toolbar on the Main screen d 0 Scene group 0 ae 0 5cene E m i ot 5 y Signal output OFF pE The Switch Scene window is displayed Note The same operation is available by tapping Scene menu Scene switch 2 Tap to select the scene to switch Scene Eroja Zcene grou D Seltch i Scene Cancel f To switch a scene group tap Switch then tap in the displayed window to select the scene group to switch 3 Tap OK The scene switches owitching Scene Groups Switches to the scene group in which the scene to be edited is stored 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Switching Scenes and Scene Groups 65 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 3ueujaJnseo A seueog Bues E 2 Tap Switch for the scene group scene Eraup 1 Scene group T M Edit Apene grodp jibe 3 Scene croup Ciear Pl The Switch Scene Group window is displayed 3 Switch to the scene group to edit e ae Acn gros s Belo meene i Carne 1 Tap and select the scene group to edit 2 Select whether a scene group sho
279. s prioritized re drawing on Measurement triggers will not be received until screen screen priority re drawing processing is complete Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Communication Startup setting Basic Operation mode Caonsunicstion emduls select SerialiEthernat Horma i UDP Sarial RS 232C A22 Korea Parallel Standard Parallel I D Fieldbus IDEE nz Cancel Setting value iid Factory default PESTA EME Normal UDP Normal TCP Normal UDP Serial Fxxx series method Specifies the communication module Ethernet PLC link Serial Ethernet SYSMAC CS CJ Normal Normal Fxxx series method Communication is CP One performed with external devices through Normal PLC link Mitsubishi communication For differences between Normal and Normal Normal Fxxx series method see the following Normal Reference serial Fxxx series method PLC Link Communication is performed via a link area RS 232C PLC link with the PLC RS 422 SYSMAC CS CJ Parallel CP One Standard Parallel I O Communication is performed via a PLC link Mitsubishi standard parallel interface Parallel Fieldbus Communication is performed via EtherCAT communication and EtherNet IP EtherCAT is valid only OFE when FZM1 controller is used t EtherCAT Fildbus EtherNet IP FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 135 JUBSWUOJIAUQ uJajs
280. s set in Electronic flash setting of the Camera Image Input processing item Reference amp Processing ltem List Manual Electronic Flash Setting p 18 EE BH ON Shutter trigger OFF 7 for Camera0 On Delay between STEP Camera 0 Shutter trigger o BHL for Camera 1 ON Delay between STEP Camera 1 stcouto OFF ON Delay between STEP STGOUT STGOUTO pulse width srcour OFF 3 L ON TEE 9 Delay between STEP STGOUT STGOUT1 pulse width 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Camera Inter camera setting The Inter camera Setting window is displayed 2 Tap of each item and set values Delay i len STEP comeral delay js 6 127 we STEP camera delay 0 A122 xs STEP camera delay n Dee 5 022 Dee STEP tsmeras delay Jed 8 122 sx Help UE Cancel Item SE wells Description Factory default P STEP Camera 0 delay STEP Camera 1 delay 0 to 511 STEP Camera 2 delay STEP Camera 3 delay Set delay between receiving the STEP signal and the beginning of camera exposure Delay time count x 30 us 122 us 1 count 30 us Max 15 ms 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Inter camera Setting window closes FZ3 User s Manual Setting Conditions for Camera Use 129 ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu 5 Ju9uJuOJIAU3 uJajs S y BuiDueu o Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measur
281. s used Communication specifications are performed according to the settings in Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 183 Example of input format SCENE command SICIENE T T fr 7 e Scene No max 2 digits Enter a delimiter at the end of commands In this manual delimiters are expressed with Separate parameters with spaces Not required before delimiters In the following cases an error occurs The system quits abnormally and the return values are returned when an error occurs When non existing commands are specified The number of parameters is incorrect The range of the parameters is incorrect The content of parameters is incorrect When action cannot be ended correctly with an action instruction command ESSZS l1 1 0 Commands can be input and measurement results can be output only when the Main screen is at the front Cannot receive commands when setting windows or the Edit Flow windows are displayed excluding Serial Confirmation On the Main screen even if the screen is switched to the Edit Flow window etc the data output after measurement will not be interrupted before all data is output Can not react to commands when windows other than the Main screen are displayed Command List Non procedure This section explains the input format for each command used in the serial normal method Commands are input with ASCII code Both lowercase and
282. sage Please check appears check to see if there is unnecessary data in the USB memory and save after this data has been deleted About USB Drive Names A controller is equipped with 4 USB interfaces If multiple USB memory devices are plugged in specify the USB memory drive that is to be the destination The drive names of USB memory devices are called USBDisk USBDisk2 USBDisk3 and USBDisk4 according to the sequence in which devices are inserted into the controller If the controller however is started with more than one USB memory device inserted drive names 1 will be assigned based on the ports in which the USB memory devices are inserted Depending on the controller type USB memory devices are recognized and drive name will be assigned using the following sequence 1 In the case of FZ3 9 OO H9 LIL USB drives are assigned as drives E V F G and H in the order in which they are plugged Integrated panel type 1 Left side of the front 2 Right side of the front 3 Front of the side face 4 Back of the side face 116 Basic Knowledge about Data Saving FZ3 User s Manual BOX type 1 Lower left of the front 2 Lower right of the front 3 Upper left of the front 4 Upper right of the front portant 1 h hm h When the BOX type controller is used If USB memory devices are separately connected to adjacent USB interfaces the contact between USB memory devices may possibly lead to failu
283. se target command codes Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 FZ3 User s Manual NG 1 FFFF FFFF Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 171 seoi eq jeuiex3 uw Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 Setting values related to image logging 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Setting Unit Data Sets the specified processing unit data In processing unit data setting acquisition external reference table No 139 verification string of Character Inspection cannot be used Command PLC to controller Command r Bit r T the External Reference Response Controller to PLC t area Description top channel 19 12 11 8 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Com E 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Response B So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOU 9 T JI am o Setting Date and Time Sets the date and time of the internal calendar timer in the controller 172 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command PLC to controller Command area top channel 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Comma
284. sed in each communication FTP uses 20 and 21 for I O ports regardless of the I O port number settings The settings are confirmed and the Ethernet window closes 242 Externally Outputting Data through FTP FZ3 User s Manual Communication Example This section introduces methods for outputting logging image files using Internet browsers When actually performing this operation it is necessary to create software for outputting data In the case of FZ3 9 OO H9 ODO only 2 USB memory devices can be accessed 1 Input the controller IP address in the Internet browser Here the default controller address 10 5 5 100 is used as an example of IP address The folders in the controller are shown E3 i 10 3 5 00 Miota Iver eet Caqelur er Fie Edi iew FrwcHihes Tools dip Quei oomen eher TE MALNNENE 7 Addas gl munis E 1 INN gt E inks Fie amd Folder Tasks LJ Nooeark LJ BANDE ia Make amaw folder unish mis tiger ba the D 4 Conese ane a Wat add SEDI L LIED is Jl 1 LU Shara thes Foie PI Dihe Places Folder name Description Network This folder is used for management Data cannot be saved within this folder This folder is for storing logging images and data files When the RAMDisk is set as RAMDisk a MM the save destination files are stored in this folder l Displayed when a USBDisk is plugged into the controller When the USBDisk is set USBDisk b
285. setting flow GATE output may be started when the BUSY signal is ON Note that the OR signal and GATE signal do not necessarily operate simultaneously Example 2 ON when STEP signal can be input When through images are being displayed the READY signal READY will turn to OFF but the STEP signal is received During the through display determine whether or not STEP input is allowed based on the BUSY signal Input signal Signal Function Input measurement triggers from external devices such as optic switches etc Perform STEP measurement once synchronous with the STEP signal turning on OFF gt ON Turn the STEP signal ON for at least 0 5 ms A noise filter filter initial setting value 100 us is set in STEP input Reference The following can be changed with regard to the READY signal Handling of ERROR signal when STEP signal is input during measurement Reference amp Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 130 ESZHy 0 o L1 L o When parallel continuous measurement is engaged and continuous STEP signal is input switching of scene group should be avoided When this is performed set Unchecked in Save scene group on switch scene in either of the settings items below Switch Scene Group window Reference amp Switching Scene Groups p 65 Measure setting in the Measure menu Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 130 Continuo
286. signal when the READY signal is turned OFF The command will not be executed correctly This does not change when an error is being cleared BUSY Do not however clear an error when the BUSY signal is turned ON The command will not be executed correctly OR This does not change when an error is being cleared DOO to 15 This does not change when an error is being cleared GATE This does not change when an error is being cleared 238 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Input signal Signal Function DIO Turns the command ON DI1 to 5 Turns the command OFF DI6 Turns the command ON This is the trigger signal to clear an error DI7 After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 ON after an interval over 1 ms After checking that the ERROR signal has turned OFF turn DI7 OFF and then turn DIO to 6 OFF About Multiple Image Input Function The function that enables continuous high speed image input is called the multiple image input function The next STEP signal can be received at the point when image input is complete It is not necessary to wait until measurement processing is complete Whether image input is complete or not can be checked with the status of the READY signal In the case of FZ3 9 9 H9P P where two CPUs are installed you can use the Single line High speed mode function that causes the two CPUs to alternately process measurement to shorten the shortest takt time 1 to as much as one half 1 The sh
287. ssing spead Busy stale nalified Data transmision intariintad Lala processing in buer memory ainsifficsent bufar capacity Busy alassa amp naled Sand daty 29 Send gali There are two flow control methods Hardware Flow Control and Software Flow Control With this product Software Flow Control is used to adjust transmission speed Model The image pattern that serves as the inspection target Characteristics portions are extracted from images of the object and registered as model registration FZ3 User s Manual Terminology Explanations 327 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Unit Reference Processing unit p 327 2 s complement Binary numbers are generally used to represent negative numbers Negative numbers are expressed by Inverting all bits of a positive number and adding 1 to the result Example 1 is expressed as 2 s complement 1 can be calculated by 0 1 In the case of 1 minus 1 00000000 0 00000001 i 1 iiiiilil 1 4im 1 is expresses with 2 s Complement for 8 bits There are methods for simple calculation without performing this kind of computation For instance Negative number inverting all bits of a positive number and then adding 1 to the result DOO00001 1 Inverty all bits 11111110 Plus 1 fcu F Lait j i The first digit is used to judge whether the number is positive or negative When 0 Positive
288. st the positions of objects to be measurement 3 Adjust the focal distance of the lens When using an auto focus camera or an intelligent camera focus and the iris can be automatically adjusted Note If a camera is used together with a lens turn the focus ring of the lens to adjust the focus Reference Processing ltem List Manual Lens Setting p 23 The light intensity of an intelligent camera can be adjusted from the controller Reference Processing ltem List Manual Lighting Control p 19 FZ3 User s Manual Preparing Controllers and Cameras 23 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg Ed o 1 Lh When using a small size digital camera check that the model and serial number of the camera head and camera amplifier match When a camera head and camera amplifier of different models and serial numbers are connected they may not operate correctly _ Model 9 et Serial No w LEER I i ww e 3 e Check model and serial No Intelligent Camera with Lighting Function Proper lighting is of crucial importance to vision sensors If an intelligent camera is connected lighting can be controlled from the controller Features of intelligent cameras are as follows Asingle camera enables testing of illumination from various angles so it is possible to shorten the lighting setting time and test measurement time The controller controls lighting so lighting can be adjusted depending upon the product
289. sult NG 5 Defect 0 to 999 6 Position X 0 to 99999 9999 7 Position Y 0 to 99999 9999 8 Defect area 0 to 999999999 9999 9 Defect gravity X 0 to 99999 9999 10 Defect gravity Y 0 to 99999 9999 103 Reflect to overall judgement 0 ON 1 OFF 0 4 1 8 2 12 120 Upper limit of defect size 3 16 4 24 5 32 6 64 27 2 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 121 122 123 124 125 126 Lower limit of defect size Defect judgement Set Get 0 to 999 Set Get 0 4 1 8 2 12 3 16 4 24 5 32 6 64 Defect color Set Get 0 Both 1 White 2 Black Area judgement Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 Precise Defect 0 No judgement not yet measured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Defect Get only 0 to 999999999 9999 6 Position X Get only 0 to 999999999 9999 7 Position Y Get only O to 999999999 9999 8 Area Get only 0 to 999999999 9999 9 Gravity X Get only O to 999999999 9999 10 Gravity Y Get only O to 999999999 9999 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get sh 1 OFF Detection object color M Si MOOD OR tep for monochrome cameras only eeu Fe 2 Black 127 Defect detection direction X Set Get i x 128 Defect detection direction Y Set Get xd A si emen Sem o To 132 Area meas LV Set Get 0 to 999 133 Area judgement Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 273 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o 134 135 0 OFF 1 ON
290. sult OK 1 Judgement result NG l 0 RGB filter 100 Filter kind Set Get 1 HSV filter 0 Red filter 1 Green filter 2 Blue filter 3 Cyan filter 101 RGB filter kind Set Get 4 Magenta filter 5 Yellow filter 6 Brightness filter R G B 7 Brightness filter R 2G B 8 Custom filter 102 Gain Red Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 103 Gain Green Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 104 Gain Blue Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 105 HSV filter kind Set Get bau 1 Fine 106 Standard Hue Set Get 0 to 359 107 SeUGet 10to 180 108 Ppr IN Or Set Get 0 to 255 Saturation 109 nodes Set Get 0 to 255 Saturation 284 Compensate image FZ3 User s Manual Extract Color Filter 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 OFF 120 Fill profile Set Get 1 Fill profile 2 Filling up holes 121 Inverse area presence Set Get dnd 1 ON 0 Measurement image 122 Image kind Set Get Le d 2 Selection color image 3 Binary image l l 0 Multiple selections disabled 123 Multiple selections Set Get 1 Multiple selections enabled 0 Binary image 124 Output image Set Get 1 All color image 0 Not used 130 Usage flag 0 Set Get 1 Used 0 Not used 130 10 x N Usage flag N Set Get 1 Used N20to7 N Oto 7 Default value 1 only for 0 Default value O for all others 131 10 x N OR NOT setting N 0 OR N20to7 N Oto7 PENARI 1 NOT 132 10 x N Register the max color hue N
291. surement is performed one time 0010 1020 Starts continuous measurement 0010 1030 Completes continuous measurement 0010 2010 Clears measurement values 0010 3010 Saves in controller References Reference Details p 164 Reference Details p 164 Reference Details p 165 Reference Details p 165 Reference Details p 166 FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 163 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N 0010 F010 Restarts the controller Reference Details p 166 Scene control command Command area top channel 3 Function References 0020 2000 Acquires scene group No Reference b Details p 167 0030 1000 Switching Scenes Reference Details p 168 0030 2000 Switch the scene group No Reference b Details p 168 Settings acquisition change command Command area top channel 3 Function References 0040 1000 Acquires unit data Reference Details p 169 0040 2000 Acquires the current date and time Reference Details p 170 0040 3000 Acquires system version information Reference Details p 170 0040 4000 Acquires setting data related to image logging Reference Details p 171 0050 1000 Sets unit data Reference Details p 172 0050 2000 Sets the date time Reference I Details p 172 0050 4000 Changes settings related to image logging Reference I Details p 173 0070 4000 Saves image data Reference Details p 174
292. surement region Defect Defect detection size Increasing Defect size allows for shortening of processing time but this will reduce measurement accuracy 322 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual Setting item Description Specify the upper and lower limits of defect detection size based on the size of scratch or contamination to be detected The larger the difference between upper and lower limits the easier it is to detect scratches or contamination of various sizes For both upper and lower limits higher values for defect detection size limits leads to weaker detection sensitivity and shorter processing time Upper Defect detection size Lower S Defects 1 i Sensitivity high 3 low on lt gt shon Handling Coordinates The processing items for measuring positions have a setting item called Output parameter with which you can select how to handle coordinates In Output parameter you can set Output coordinates or Calibration Output Coordinates Select coordinate types to be output to external devices Example Measurement image Image with position ps image without position ow pos Image when setting compensation compensation m Reference position for left upper deflection The area outside of This angle t used as imaging range is tumed model for position mio black compensation Before position compensation Coordinate values before
293. t an image logging file is stored in a RAMDisk please move the content on the RAMDisk to a USBDisk to open up memory and reopen the set up window Please redefine the upper and lower warning range limits such that they are within the range between the lower and upper evaluation limits Reference Processing Item List Manual Judgement conditions Trend Monitor p 378 Insufficient memory may occur during measurement Reset the model parameters Search Reference Processing Item List Manual Judgement is NG Insufficient Memory p 57 Flexible search Reference Processing Item List Manual Judgement is NG Insufficient Memory p 66 Classification Reference Processing Item List Manual Judgement is NG Insufficient Memory p 118 This is displayed when the significant abnormality occurs in the controller system Please contact one of our branches or regional offices Low battery for the backup of date and time data level The batteries need to be replaced Please return old batteries to one of our branches or regional offices Is a USBDisk set to the controller A USBDisk is needed to read scenes after scene group 1 Error Messages and Troubleshooting 309 sexipueddy sexipueddy E Failed to switch scene group or save scene group on switch Failed to clear scene group Failed to load scene group Data is corrupted or memory is insufficient Scene group data starts with i
294. t for the device only is to be performed without results being output Continuous Place a check here when continuous measurement is to be performed meas Tapping the Measure button starts continuous measurement 3 Tap Measure in the Toolbar 0 S5cene group 0 Kee D Scene 0 NE Signal output OFF Data save Ei Scene switch Through Camera Image input Measurement is performed Note With continuous measurement the Measure button changes to the Stop meas button during the measurement To stop continuous measurement tap Stop meas 4 Check measurement results 5 If necessary adjust the setting values for each processing unit again Moving to the property window can be done directly by tapping the button of any processing unit set in the flow FZ3 User s Manual Performing Test Measurement 77 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o Procltem setting button Test images can be saved This function is called the logging function After setting conditions these test images can be used in performing test measurement again Reference Logging Measurement Values and Measurement Images p 96 ESZS 1 L The measurement interval and display update interval will vary for continuous measurement with test measurement settings and continuous measurement with serial commands parallel commands Evalu
295. t of the Main screen and tap LCD Off j Fimage view setting mage layout Lime ti e Activa Imat baga mode Positions Sub image bem A confirmation message is displayed 2 Tap OK TET In case of an integrated cantroller shut off the power of Click the bottom of screen if powering nn spain 28 Saving Settings and Turning Power Off FZ3 User s Manual Power to the LCD is turned off Turning LCD On Again This function is specific to FZ3 300 700 900 series LCD integrated controllers Tap the lower part of the monitor screen Then the LCD will be switched on FZ3 User s Manual Saving Settings and Turning Power Off 29 uoneJedo oeJojeg uoneJedo eJojeg This section describes the operation mode FZ3 9 OO H9 LILI only Utilize the dual core CPU to set an operation mode appropriate for the condition of use This function is effective in improving the takt time and reducing the downtime For setting use Startup setting Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Startup setting Scene group Scene f ADJUST C RUN peralian priority 7 Measurement result priority Menu operation priority pMeasurement initialization priority f Measurement trigger receipt priority Processing of re drawing on screen erieriiv 2 Tap Operation mode 30 Setting Ope
296. t result NG 5 Correlation value 0 to 100 6 Measure X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Measure Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Angle 0 180 to 180 9 Magnification X 50 to 150 10 Magnification Y 50 to 150 11 Reference X 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 12 Reference Y 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 13 Reference angle 180 to 180 14 Detection point X 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 15 Detection point Y Get only 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get een 1 Before scroll ibrati 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get LON 0 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get t OFF 0 3x3 io ae 2 1xT7 3 9x9 121 Edge Level Set Get 0 to 255 120 Mask size Set Get 252 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 122 Detection point X Set Get 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 123 Detection point Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 124 Reference X Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 125 Reference Y Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 126 Upper limit of the corr Set Get 0 to 100 127 Lower limit of the corr Set Get 0 to 100 128 Upper limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 129 Lower limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 130 Upper limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 131 Lower limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 132 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 133 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 134 Candidate Point Level Set Get 0 to 99 135 Model skipping Set Get
297. tch Scene Group window Reference amp Switching Scene Groups p 65 Measure setting in the Measure menu Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 130 Output Format Each time measurement is performed the measurement result is output Output can be selected to turn on either when the judgement result is OK or when it is NG The factory default setting is ON at NG 226 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 221 Signal Output contents OR signal Overall judgement results are output Parallel judgement output The judgement results of judgement 0 to 15 set in the processing item Parallel Judgement Output are output to DO 0 to 15 Reference Processing Item List Manual Parallel Judgement Output p 426 Parallel Data Output The measurement values set in data 0 to 7 in the processing item Parallel Data Output are output in 16 bit format Reference Processing Item List Manual Parallel Data Output p 423 Only integers are output Decimals are rounded up The range of values that can be output is as follows Binary format 32768 to 32768 BCD format 999 to 999 When measurement values are outside of these ranges the following apply Binary format When 32768 is gt measurement value 32767 is output When measurement value is gt 32768 32768 is output DO 0
298. than plain Detecting defects and foreign materials References Defect Precise Defect FZ3 Hxxx series Effective for inspection for contamination or spots on plain backgrounds Reference Processing Item List Manual Defect p 215 Reference Processing ltem List Manual Precise Defect p 223 Defect Precise Defect FZ3 Hxxx series Effective for exterior inspection of scratches and burrs on parts Reference Processing Item List Manual Defect p 215 Defect Burr measurement Reference Processing ltem List Manual Precise Defect p 223 Fine Matching Effective for detection of minor defects and contamination on labels etc Reference Processing ltem List Manual Fine Matching p 231 58 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Count Method objective References Inspection for number of pins Inspection of the number of screws Inspection of the number of labels Edge Pitch Effective when calculating the number of IC or connector pins Reference Processing ltem List Manual Edge Pitch p 130 Measuring number of IC pins EC Circle Search Effective when inspecting by focusing on circular outline information Reference Processing Item List Manual EC Circle Search p 90 Labeling Labeling FZ3 Hxxx series Effective when counting the labels and measuring their positions Reference Processing ltem List Manual Labeling
299. than in the parallel mode such as when non procedure commands or PLC link measurement commands are sent STEP input STEP input STEP input STEP input OFF STEP D Q ON Image Input D OFF 2 READY ON measurement processing OFF BUSY ON STEP STEP l Messa ement pipzssz 240 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual The image logging file and data logging file saved in the controller can be output using FTP protocol FZ3 only functions as a FTP server and cannot serve as a FTP client FTP uses the FTP passive mode Use port 21 for FTP control commands and responses and use the port specified by the Ethernet I O setting for FTP data transfer downloading of Is command results and files ESZS L 1 When sending or receiving files using the FTP function make sure to create file names using one byte alphanumeric characters Set the communication specifications such as IP address and DNS In addition perform input format settings ESZS 0 Ll Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial Ethernet The Ethernet window is displayed 2 Setthe following items d Eg Do dul a Dou e i E a Sia mmm FZ3 User s Manual Externally Outputting Data through FTP 241 seoi e eul9X3 uim Buneoiu
300. the processing unit if Multiple selection is tapped Checked processing items can be operated as a group ot t File m Units of other scenes can be referred to and added to the current scene flow Selecting a scene to refer to displays the flow for that scene If a processing unit is inserted the numbers for the subsequent processing units increase by one With processing items related to results output or branch control the numbers for processing units set as references also automatically increase by one If a button other than Paste is tapped after pasting a processing unit continued pasting of the processing cannot be performed If a processing unit is deleted the numbers for the subsequent processing units decrease by one With processing items related to results output or branch control the numbers for processing units set as references also automatically decrease by one To make a specific processing unit not display in a flow on the ADJUST window or RUN window insert a single byte at the beginning of the processing unit name wx 64 Editing Processing Units in Scenes FZ3 User s Manual Switching Scenes and Scene Groups Set up can be changed by changing the scene With factory settings the default display is scene 0 when the power is switched on In addition multiple scenes can be created Scene 1 to 31 Also when combined with the scene group function up to 1024 scenes can be set Instruction
301. tion bits 101 00 Data output completion bits Command area 1 Set the measurement command lower word Set the measurement command upper word 1 is written to command area 0 and the command execution bit turns on If the data output completion bits are off the data output request bits turn on If the data output completion bits are on the data output request bits turn off 178 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link Measurement Output FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure This section describes how to set required communication specifications and describes the I O format for communication with external devices via serial interface RS 232C 422 connection using a non procedure method with commands Communication is performed via the Ethernet using the UDP IP TCP IP protocols Communication Processing Flow Non procedure This section explains the processing flow of serial non procedure communication 1 1 connection Example Input measurement command and acquire the results Controller J PC Input command MEASURE Start io measuret BUSY signal of parallel interface is ON during Measurement Output Procitem results Regae Frocltem results When Flow Control is set ta Xon Mott Ita PO has no response within preset overtime line breakage or PC malfunction maybe occur signalling
302. tment Efficiency Convenient when measuring a large amount of image samples and classification or adjustment is performed with each judgement Files in which NG error files and OK files are mixed can be continuously remeasured automatically with the system stopping at images with a specified condition OK NG and these files being moved 1 In the Control area of the Main screen tap Test measurement 2 Place a check next to Monitoring Judgement and set the judgement conditions for identification Alio H meas orton Juapervent we x If the specified judgement condition is achieved when continuous measurement is performed measurement stops and the following message is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 91 uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Burwood If OK is selected tB B 10 34 10 43 37 8517 if2 The judgwen rasull became Dk Adiuel aetiting Nove 1m ga Tije fk p wage File move in mm gu lie If NG is selected 2002 10 24 10 43 20 165 i fz The iudmeni resull becane NG Adjusdi seitting dove aage fide mage file save ia a huse sk m 3 Select the processing for the measured image For Adjust setting Tap the Adjust setting button For Move Image file Specify the save destination and tap OK uoneJedo Bunjejg ueujaunseeyw s Buiruuoneg o PHE RAD i sk I New folder AGS New folder 1 4 USBI sk
303. to 15 signal BCD format When 999 is gt measurement value 999 is output When measurement value is gt 999 999 is output For the output format select from a 2 s complement binary format or BCD format For 2 s complement see Reference Terminology Explanations p 325 Output sequence Measurement results are output in sequence starting with the smallest processing unit number Example When Parallel Judgement Output is processing unit 5 and Parallel Data Output is processing unit 8 OFF BUSY ON if b Perform Measurement Judgment p DO TO E 0 to 4 Data 0 EX Data 2 LJAL Result of Unit 5 Result of Unit 8 Note 1 If the operation mode FZ3 9 9 H9 only is Multi line random trigger mode line O uses DOO to DO7 while line 1 uses DO8 to DO15 For parallel judgement output setting set the judgement result to be output to expressions 0 to 7 for lines O and 1 Reference Processing ltem List Manual Parallel Judgement Output p 426 The parallel data output range is between 127 and 127 for binary data and 9 and 9 for BCD data FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 227 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJu0 DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DuijeoiunuJuo DUE Duipoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Reference After measurement the data output by the OR signal or DO signal is held until the next measurement is performed Note that t
304. to CHAR NUM MAX detected setting 2 T 162 PPPOP OrNUNPET lacca 0 to CHAR NUM MAX of characters detected 163 OWO IMIE OF NUMBEI oiei 0 to CHAR NUM MAX of characters detected Judgement 164 comparison character Set Get Comparison string used for judgement string Classification 300 to 335 comparison character Set Get Verification string used for classification string 0 Not output 400 Character output flag Set Get 1 Output 2 8 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 401 402 403 Output device Set Get Error output Set Get Error output flag 0 RS 232C 1 Ethernet Set Get Message output while outputting an error 2D Codet No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 6 E E AEE Get only Number of characters included in code detected 7 Decoded character string Get only Character string included in code detected 0 to INDEX NUM MAX 1 1 Where there was no match with any of 8 Index Get only i l l the index comparison strings or the index comparison string has not been set up 9 Integrated quality Get only 0 to 4 10 Contrast Get only 0 to 4 11 Modulation Get only 0 to 4 12 Fixed pattern damage Get only 0 to 4 13 Decode Get only 0 to 4 14 Axis non uniformity Get only 0 to 4 15 Grid non uniformity Get only 0 to 4 16 Correction of error not used Get only 0 to 4 103 Reflect to overall judge
305. trol Handshaking R A try interval ms ogg JI se seoi eq jeuiex3 uj Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spouse Hele uk Lanes 160 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Setting value Setting item Factory default Description Command area Data register Area File register Set the Command area Link register 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Command 0 area Address Response area Data register Area File register Set the Response area Link register 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Response eagles 100 area Data output area Data register Area File register Set the Data output area Link register 0 to 99999 Set the top channel address in the Data Dos 200 output area Set whether or not to provide an interlock with the PLC when performing data output None Data is output regardless of the status of signals from the PLC GATE is always OFF Handshaking Data is output after confirming DSA from the PLC None Output control Handshaking 1000 to 999999 Retry interval ms 10000 Set the communication retry interval 5 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the serial interface window closes Checking Communication Status Use PLC tools etc to check the communication status ESZS 1 1 ll 1 1 The communication time is different depending on the
306. ts Reference amp Position Compensation p 50 Reference Locating Measurement Objects Not Inclined p 51 Maung wie DOSIHOTKOODISCES Reference Locating Measurement Objects Inclined p 52 Reference Internal and External Inspection p 52 Reference amp Presence Inspection p 53 Inspecting the status of objects Reference Dimension Inspection Measurement p 53 Reference amp Text Comparison Inspection p 54 Reference Quantity Inspection Measurement p 55 Reference Defect Contamination Inspection p 55 Inspecting for defective products Reference Burr Inspection p 54 Reference Inspection for Presence of Different Objects p 56 FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 49 MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes MO 4 1ueujaJnseo A seueog Dunes E Position Compensation Marking for position compensation Intersection of rectangle or line o is shape of marking changed Other than above not changed not oblique e changed Li 50 Processing Item Selection Guidelines Procitem name Edge Position 1 LI llprprpyc a Position Compensation Position Compensation Position Compensation Flexible Search Position Compensation FZ3 User s Manual Locating Measurement Objects Not Inclined dape of localing marking Specific object Procitem name chan an amp eir a marking Position of Marking Position of an ob
307. twidth Lower limit of the lostwidth Monochrome edge detection mode Edge level absolute value Edge level specification method Scan lines Scan width Dispayarea Display area direction Set Get 0 F Measure type Area division method Set Get 1 F dist X MAX Y MAX sqrt X MAX X MAX Y MAX Y MAX Color Data 262 No Data name Judge Average R component value Average G component value Measurement orward 1 Reverse Set Get 0 Projection 1 Derivation 0 Do not fix number of area divisions ix the number of area divisions Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Get only 0 to 255 Get only 0 to 255 FZ3 User s Manual Average B component value Get only 0 to 255 Color difference Get only 0 to 442 Color deviation Get only 0 to 219 9705 Density average i for monochrome cameras only EDO Ld E N Getony 0 000 to 127 000 1 OFF izati 0 OFF w e an sevcet 0128 o sevcet ot025s w sevcet 010127 w n seem 010127 Gravity and Area No Set Get Data range M 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Get only 0 to 999999999 9999 6 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Get only 0 to 999999999 9 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9
308. type Reproducibility of lighting settings is improved Settings can be modified without changing lighting Reference Processing Items List Manual Screen Adjust Settings Camera Image Input p 19 24 Preparing Controllers and Cameras FZ3 User s Manual Input Operations Input operations differ depending on the type of controller Controller integrated with LCD Operation with touch pen BOX type controller Operation with mouse and trackball Operation of Touch Pen With a Controller integrated with LCD perform the following operations when operating the touch screen with the touch pen Tapping Touch screen Lightly touch the screen once with the touch pen and immediately take it off Perform when selecting items etc Drag Draw while pressing on the screen lightly with the touch pen ESSZS LL Be sure to use the supplied touch pen for touch screen operations Using a pencil or ballpoint pen may damage the touch screen n addition response to operations may be delayed if the screen is tapped continuously and rapidly Basic Operation of Mouse and Trackball With a BOX type controller use a mouse with a USB interface or commercially available trackball See the list for recommended products Please refer to the product catalog Note Donotuse the right mouse button scroll wheel or other buttons FZ3 User s Manual Input Operations 20 uoneJedo eJojeg uoneJedo eJo
309. ubsequent measurement cannot be received until free capacity becomes Logging available All measurement target images are logged but the measurement takt Logging time becomes longer priority Measurement will continue even if there is no free capacity in the controller memory New logging is not performed until free capacity Measurement becomes available in the controller memory The measurement takt time is maintained but some measurement may not be logged 5 Set the data logging conditions The data format is set with the processing item Data Logging ala logeing 8 None Only WG CAU Deel iinet ion Polder fame WRANDIsEM Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Setting Setting item ee Description default None Measurement data is not saved Measurement data is saved when an NG error occurs in a unit before Data Only NG Data Logging If an NG error occurs after the Data Logging Logging processing unit data logging is not performed All measurement data is saved 6 Set the logging data save destination ate logging Hone C Only NG Ol ztination Folder n me WRAND i ck ic Setting value Setting item Tesis Description RAMDisk The data is saved in the specified destination folder RAMDisk or USBDisk Set the file name with the processing unit Data Logging Edo 0 oo 0 o 1 If a USB memory or a network drive is specified as the save destinatio
310. uld be saved when switching to another scene group Setting Setting item a Description default Checked When the scene group is switched the data of the Save scene scene group before switching is saved group on The scene group data is not saved when switching to switch scene Unchecked another scene group Therefore the switching period can be shortened Note The setting for whether to save a scene group during switching is linked to the settings of the Measurement Setting window Reference b Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 130 3 Tap OK The scene group is switched and the screen returns to the Scene Maintenance window ESSE oO 2 8eeee When a check is inserted in Save scene group on switch scene data may be lost if the power is cut off during scene group switching During scene group switching make sure that the power is not cut off 66 Switching Scenes and Scene Groups FZ3 User s Manual Copies and pastes scenes within a scene group This is a convenient function for reusing a created scene with only one portion being changed 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 In the scene list tap the source scene to copy and then tap Copy 0 1 z 3 4 15 L T 8 fal 3 In the scene list tap the scene to which the copy is to be pasted and then tap Paste The conf
311. uppercase letters can be used FZ3 99 9 FZ3 H9U H The configuration is as follows USBDisk E USBDisk2 F USBDisk3 G and USBDisk4 H Scene control command Acquires the current scene No SCENE S Switches scene No currently being used Reference b gt Dias p 197 Acquires the scene group No currently in use SCNGROUP SG Switch the scene group No Reference je Details p 198 186 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Measurement control Measurement value acquisition commands Command Abbreviation Function References Perform measurement once Reference fe Details p 105 MEASURE M Start continuous measurement Reference b Details 0 195 Complete continuous measurement Reference W Details p 190 OFF pm SCRSWITCH OFF Switches the ADJUST window RUN window Reference W Details p 202 Acquires the parameters and or measurement values of specified UNITDATA UD proces ena UE Reference b gt Deals p208 Sets the parameters of specified processing units Settings acquisition change command Command Abbreviation Function References or Acquires the current date and time DATE OFF Gatsihedalefima Reference je Details p 190 or Acquires the current image display status DISPCOND OFF Changes the image display state Reference fe Details 0 192 Acquires settings related to image logging SYSDATA OFF Changes settings related to image logging Reference W
312. us Startup Setting p 133 setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link Communication specifications such as link areas or communication speed and data length are set Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link p 157 152 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual portant O0 1 Before setting the communication specifications set the Serial Ethernet communication module to PLC link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One or to PLC link MELSEC Q series in the case of a PLC by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation save the setting and then restart the system When the system is restarted the communication settings are initialized Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 133 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device When making system settings Ethernet settings do not send external input into the Ethernet 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial Ethernet The Ethernet window is displayed 2 In the communication setting area set the following items Ethernet PLC Link C Obtain an P address aulomallcally f Use khe following IF address P addrass 10 5 J 5 100 Subnet mask TT m 255 955 T Defaull gateway i mw mm 5 110 x DNG server HO nef hmm Bla Lh bial Ingut gtput setting
313. us measurement portant h 3 JD 1 Measurement is given priority when continuous measurement is being performed As a result the measurement result display overall judgement image judgement for each processing unit in the flow display detailed results may not be updated When continuous measurement ends the measurement results of the final measurement are displayed 230 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Example When 1 expressions are set in Parallel Data Output OR DO GATE Reference Start Measurement Exit Measurement Perform Perform Perform Perform Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Final Final Snake eee une NS judgmeng judgment judgment OFF ON DIN meer Rising time Output time Output period OO P Total output time Output period X number of output data The output signal functions the same as when Output Control is set to None Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 228 Input signal Signal Function DIO to 6 It turns off while continuously measuring DI7 being turned on This is the execution trigger DI7 After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 on after an interval over 1 ms Reference Always have this turned ON during a continuous measurement Stops continuous measurement when this is turned OFF The ERROR signal turns on when the input command is not correctly performed Acquis
314. utput 1 data item for Data Output Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 221 Only designate the STEP signal for measurement command input When measurement using serial commands and continuous measurement are performed the output time will not match and this can cause controller malfunctions Example Stepped transmission line utilizing star wheel The discharge timing for when a defective part is found and the measurement results output timing can be synchronized Discharging device GATE DO Controller When Number of delay is sel as 4 measurement resulls are oulpul after 4 delays Inputting a measurement trigger in the STEP signal Example When 2 is set for Number of delay FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 233 SODIAVC E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N Start Measurement Exit Measurement OFF RUN ON 000 i STEP input STEP input STEP input STEP input STEP input OFF d ON e Ee Perform Measurement OR Final judgment Final judgment Final judgment Final judgment f p of CD of 2 of 3 tf A OFF ee GATE ON eee mo Rising time Output time Reference The output signal functions the same as when Output Control is set to None o Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 228 gt D c e Scene Scene Group S
315. utput IP address Input uiput port Wo F600 m i Helg OK Canca TT Setting value m Setting item IE Description Address setting Set the IP address of the controller When Obtain an IP address automatically Obtain an IP address is selected the IP address of the controller automatically will be automatically obtained Use the following IP address When Use the following IP address is selected set the IP address subnet mask and the default gateway address a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 IP address c 0 to 255 Input the controller IP address d 0 to 255 10 5 5 100 FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 153 So9IAe E UJ9 X YIM DunjeoiunuJuo DUE Dunoeuuo 10 SPOYJ N 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Input the subnet mask address 255 255 255 0 a b c d a 1 to 223 Default b O to 255 gateway c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 10 5 5 110 a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 DNS server c 0 to 255 Input the DNS server address d 0 to 255 10 5 5 1 Subnet mask Input the default gateway address Input Output setting a b c d a 0 to 255 Output IP b 0 to 255 address c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 nput Output 0 to 65535 Set the port No to use for data I O with the 9600 controller ES Oo o If the operation mode FZ3 9 V 8 H9 8 UH only is Multi line random trigger mode set a different I O port No for line O
316. uuo 10 SPOYJ N seoi eq jeuiex3 y m Buneoiunuuo pue Bunoeuuo JO spoujey lt Command format gt IMIEJAJSIUIRIE JC Response format When processing is performed normally Continuous measurement count easurement r gul When processing is not performed normally Parameters explanation The measurement results from the number of times continuous measurement is performed are output as a response Reference amp Output Format Non procedure p 211 Measurement result Completes continuous measurement Continuous measurement ends Command format MIEJAISIUIRIE E R Response format When processing is performed normally OJK 9s When processing is not performed normally ERE m Measurement is continuously executed To output measurement results insert a Data Output processing unit in the scene When the scene does not have a Data Output processing unit only a command response is output Reference amp Output Format Non procedure p 211 Reference Processing ltem List Manual Data Output p 418 196 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual RESET Restart the controller Command format Response format OFF SCENE or S Acquires scene No Acquires the current scene No Command format S C EINIE or S k Response format When processing is performed
317. witch 2 Starting the measurement Exiting the measurement 2 p OFF z1 RUN O ON dicis O 3 3 DIO 6 j 2 ex OFF ae DI ON 3 x rn OFF n D READY i t D OFF S BUSY j ON Command execution Output signal Signal Function RUN Turns on when the controller is available for measurement and the RUN window is displayed Turns off in the ADJUST window READY Turns OFF when a scene or a scene group is being switched Turns OFF as long as the BUSY signal is turned ON 234 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual BUSY Indicates that the controller is currently switching the scene or scene group Do not input next command while the BUSY signal is on Otherwise on going processing or commands that are input will not be performed correctly Input signal Scene switching Signal DIO to 4 DI5 DI6 DI7 Function Set scene No 0 to 31 ON OFF This is the execution trigger After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 on after an interval over 1 ms BUSY signal is on during implementation of commands If the DI7 signal OFF timing cannot be set faster than the BUSY signal OFF timing on the control side set the scene switching additional time to lengthen the BUSY signal OFF timing Reference The amount of time during which the BUSY signal is turned ON when a scene is switched can be changed Measurement setting in the Measure menu Setting conditions related to operation during m
318. y 1 Where there was no match with any of the index comparison strings or the index comparison string has not been set up Reflect to overall 0 ON n judgement eevee 1 OFF FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 2 7 Se qe soudJejoy JeuJo x3 5 JAN EAN 8 JAN EAN 8 Add On2 JAN EAN 8 Add On 5 JAN EAN 13 JAN EAN 13 Add On2 JAN EAN 13 Add On 5 UPC A UPC A Add On 2 UPC A Add On 5 UPC E UPC E Add On 2 UPC E Add On 5 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 IFT Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar NW 7 GS1 Databar RSS 14 GS1 Databar RSS Lim GS1 Databar RSS Exp Flag used for special Set Get are considered to be wild cards character judgement are considered to be character strings oO NOOR ONaO 120 Code type Set Get e c e NU S ler CONDO OBR WN OQ 121 Flag used for special 122 character Set Get classification 2 are considered to be wild cards 2 are considered to be character strings Flag showing 123 character string Set Get Flag regarding whether or not character string is displayed display results 0 Black 1 White 124 Character sting seuGet 2 Red us 3 Green 4 Blue 125 aee e SetGet 10to 100 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o display size 133 Set Get 4 to 60 0 134 Set Get 1 5 to 10 0 i 0 Check digit is not used 136 Check digit Set Get i Checkedicitisused 137 DUISErorenaraetetss eese CHAR NUM MIN
319. y 200 results 128 Horizontal Set Get 1 Display 1000 results Image Logging No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Calculation result Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 No judgement unmeasured 6 Judgement result Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 None 120 Logging condition Set Get 1 Only NG 2 All spect miroreonaens Iie sisi 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 calculation 122 to 123 m T pua MM s 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 calculation Data Logging No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to Result of Expression O l 12 Resuli or Expression Get only Calculation results of expressions 120 Measurement ID Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 121 Integer Set Get 1 to 10 122 Decimal Set Get 0 0to4 4 123 Minus Set Get 0 1 8 124 Field separator Set Get 0 OFF 1 Comma 2 Tab 3 Space 4 CR LF 125 Record separator Set Get 0 OFF 1 Comma 2 Tab 3 Space 4 CR LF 126 0 suppress Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON FZ3 User s Manual Support measurement 293 So qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo x3 5 Se qe eouoeJ9Jo JeuJo X3 o Elapsed Time No Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Elapsed Time Get only 0 to 999999 Wait 120 Waiting time Set Get 0 to 99
320. y be NG Insufficient memory with the current setting The problem occurred in the system A ERR The problem occurred in system date The system battery is insufficient A ERR Failed to switch scene FZ3 User s Manual Remedy A value must be set for this item Please set up value Do the following errors exist in settings for an expression set up Different number of open close parentheses TJG unit value function operator comma is lined next to each other Operator is set at beginning or end of expression The number of function operands is insufficient or there are more than is needed Incompliant to the conditions of expression Please check the content Reference Processing Item List Manual Setting Calculation p 338 Is the camera cable connected to the controller Is camera cable disconnected Do Select camera of Camera Image Input and Camera Switching have any errors Please check the contents of Camera setting then switch off and restart Reference Setting Conditions for Camera Use p 128 Because memory available for use was insufficient memory needed to open the window could not be secured Check the flow by adjusting the measurement region of each processing unit and the sizes of the registered models Shape search If shape search setup window is opened while the RAMDisk memory is insufficient for image logging etc on the RAMDisk a warning message is displayed In the case tha

FZ3 Series User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents